and discovered also another Island about the same bigness 20 leagues to the Westward of this From those Goats these were propogated and the Island hath taken its name from this its first Discoverer who when he returned to Lima desired a Patent for it designing to settle here and it was in his second Voyage hither that he set ashore 3 or 4 Goats which have since by their increase so well stocked the whole Island But he could never get a Patent for it therefore it lies still destitute of Inhabitants though doubtless capable of maintaining 4 or 500 Families by what may be produced off the Land only I speak much within compass for the Savanahs would at present feed 1000 head of Cattle besides Goats and the Land being cultivated would probably bear Corn or Wheat and good Pease Yams or Patatoes for the Land in their Valleys and sides of the Mountains is of a good black fruitful mould The Sea about it is likewise very productive of its Inhabitants Seals swarm as thick about this Island as if they had no other place in the World to live in for there is not a Bay nor Rock that one can get ashore on but is full of them Sea Lyon's are here in great Companys and Fish particularly Snappers and Rock-fish are so plentiful that 2 men in an hours time will take with Hook and Line as many as will serve 100 men The Seals are a sort of Creatures pretty well known yet it may not be amiss to describe them They are as big as Calves the head of them like a Dog therefore call'd by the Dutch the Sea-hounds Under each Shoulder grows a long thick Fin These serve them to swim with when in the Sea and are instead of Legs to them when on the Land for raising their Bodies up on end by the help of these Fins or Stumps and so having their Tail-parts drawn close under them they rebound as it were and throw their bodies forward drawing their hinder-parts after them and then again rising up and springing forward with their fore-parts alternately they lie tumbling thus up and down all the while they are moving on Land From their Shoulders to their Tails they grow tapering like Fish and have two small Fins on each side the Rump which is commonly covered with their Fins These Fins serve instead of a Tail in the Sea and on Land they sit on them when they give suck to their young Their hair is of divers colours as black grey dun sported looking very sleek and pleasant when they come first out of the Sea For these at John Fernando s have fine thick short Furr the like I have not taken notice of any where but in these Seas Here are always thousands I might say possibly millions of them either sitting on the Bays or going and coming in the Sea round the Island which is covered with them as they lye at the top of the Water playing and sunning themselves for a mile or two from the Shore When they come out of the Sea they bleat like Sheep for their young and tho they pass through hundreds of others young ones before they come to their own yet they will not suffer any of them to suck The young ones are like Puppies and lie much ashore but when beaten by any of us they as well as the old ones will make toward the Sea and swim very swift and nimble tho on shore they lye very sluggishly and will not go out of our ways unless we beat them but snap at us A blow on the Nose soon kills them Large Ships might here load themselves with Seals skins and Trane-oyl for they are extraordinary fat Seals are found as well in cold as hot Climates and in the cold places they love to get on Lumps of Ice where they will lie and sun themselves as here on the Land They are frequent in the Northern parts of Europe and America and in the Southern parts of Africa as about the Cape of Good Hope and at the Streights of Magellan and though I never saw any in the West Indies but in the Bay of Campeachy at certain Islands called the Alceranes and at others called the Desartes yet they are over all the American Coast of the South Seas from Terra del Fuego up to the Equinoctial Line but to the North of the Equinox again in these Seas I never saw any till as far as 21 North Lat. Nor did I ever see any in the East Indies In general they seem to resort where there is plenty of Fish for that is their food and Fish such as they feed on as Cods Groopers c. are most plentiful on rocky Coasts and such is mostly this Western Coast of the South America as I shall further relate The Sea Lion is a large creature about 12 or 14 foot long The biggest part of his body is as big as a Bull it is shaped like a Seal but 6 times as big The Head is like a Lion's Head it hath a broad Face with many long Hairs growing about its Lips like a Cat. It has a great goggle Eye the Teeth inches long about the bigness of a Mans Thumb In Capt. Sharp's time some of our Men made Dice with them They have no Hair on their Bodies like the Seal they are of a dun colour and are all extraordinary fat one of them being cut up and boil'd will yeild a Hogshed of Oil which is very sweet and wholesome to fry Meat withal The lean Flesh is black and of a course grain yet indifferent good food They will lye a week at a time ashore if not disturbed Where 3 or 4 or more of them come ashore together they huddle one on another like Swine and grunt like them making a hideous noise They eat Fish which I believe is their common food The Snapper is a Fish made much like a Roach but a great deal bigger It hath a large Head and Mouth and great Gills The Back is of a bright Red the Belly of a Silver-colour The Scales are as broad as a Shilling The Snapper is excellent meat They are in many places in the West-Indies and the South-Seas I have not seen them any where beside The Rock-fish is called by Sea-men a Grooper the Spaniards call it a Baccalao which is the name for Cod because it is much like it It is rounder than the Snapper of a dark brown colour and hath small Scales no bigger than a Silver-penny This Fish is good sweet meat and is found in great plenty on all the Coast of Peru and Chili There are only two Bays in the whole Island where Ships may Anchor these are both at the East end and in both of them is a Rivolet of good fresh Water Either of these Bays may be fortified with little charge to that degree that 50 men in each may be able to keep off 1000 and there is no coming into these Bays from the West end but with great
Paddles kept close under the Banks and so had not the strength of the stream against them as we had These Huts were close by the River on the East side of it just against the end of the Island We saw a great many other Houses a league from us on the other side of the River but the main stream into which we were now come seemed to be so swift that we were afraid to put over for fear we should not be able to get back again We found only a Hog some Fowls and Plantains in the Huts We killed the Hog and the Fowls which were drest presently Their Hogs they got as I suppose from the Spaniards by some accident or from some Neighbouring Indians who converse with the Spaniards for this that we took was of their European kind which the Spaniards have introduced them into America very plentifully especially into the Islands Jamaica Hispaniola and Cuba above all being very largely stored with them where they feed in the Woods in the day time and at night come in at the sounding of a Conch-shell and are put up in their Crauls or Pens and yet some turn wild which nevertheless are often decoyed in by the other which being all marked whenever they see an unmarked Hog in the Pen they know it 〈◊〉 a wild one and shoot him presently These Crauls I have not seen on the Continent where the Spaniards keep them tame at home Among the Wild Indians or in their Woods are no Hogs but Pecary and Warree a sort I have mentioned before After we had refreshed our selves we returned toward the mouth of the River It was the evening when we came from thence and we got to the Rivers mouth the next morning before day Our Ships when we left them were order'd to go to Gallo where they were to stay for us Gallo is a small uninhabited Island lying in between 2 and 3 Degrees North Lat. It lyeth in a wide Bay about 3 leagues from the mouth of the River Tomaco and 4 leagues and half from a small Indian Village called Tomaco The Island Gallo is of an indifferent heighth it is cloathed with very good Timber Trees and is therefore often visited with Barks from Guiaquil and other places for most of the Timber carry d from Guiaquil to Lima is first fetcht from Gallo There is a Spring of good Water at the N. E. end at that place there is a fine small Sandy Bay where there is good landing The road for Ships is against this Bay where there is good secure riding in 6 or 7 fathom water and here Ships may careen It is but shole water all about this Island yet there is a Channel to come in at where there is not less than 4 fathom water You must go in with the Tyde of Flood and come out with Ebb sounding all the way Tomaco is a large River that takes its Name from an Indian Village so called It is reported to spring from the rich Mountains about Quito It is thick inhabited with Indians and there are some Spaniards that live there who traffick with the Indians for Gold It is shoal at the mouth of the River yet Barks may enter The Village Tomaco is but small and is seated not far from the mouth of the River It is a place to entertain the Spanish Merchants that come to Gallo to load Timber or to traffick with the Indians for Gold At this place one Doleman with 7 or 8 Men more once of Capt. Sharp's Crew were kill'd in the year 1680. From the branch of the River St. Jago where we now lay to Tomaco is about 5 leagues the Land low and full of Creeks so that Canoas may pass within Land through those Creeks and from thence into Tomaco River The 28th day we left the River of St. Jago crossing some Creeks in our way with our Canoas and came to an Indian House where we took the Man and all his Family We staid here till the afternoon and then rowed toward Tomaco with the Man of this House for our Guide We arrived at Tomaco about 12 a clock at night Here we took all the Inhabitants of the Village and a Spanish Knight called Don Diego de Pinas This Knight came in a Ship from Lima to lade Timber The Ship was riding in a Creek about a mile off and there were only one Spaniard and 8 Indians aboard We went in a Canoa with 7 Men and took her she had no Goods but 12 or 13 Jars of good Wine which we took out and the next day let the Ship go Here an Indian Canoa came aboard with three Men in her These Men could not speak Spanish neither could they distinguish us from Spaniards the wild Indians usually thinking all white Men to be Spaniards We gave them 3 or 4 Callabashes of Wine which they freely drank They were streight-bodied and well limb'd Men of a mean heighth their Hair black long visag'd small Noses and Eyes and were thin fac'd ill look'd Men of a very dark copper color A little before night Captain Swan and all of us returned to Tomaco and left the Vessel to the Seamen The 31st day two of our Canoas who had been up the River of Tomaco returned back again to the Village They had rowed 7 or 8 leagues up and found but one Spanish House which they were told did belong to a Lady who lived at Lima she had Servants here that traded with the Indians for Gold but they seeing our Men coming ran away yet our Men found there several Ounces of Gold in Callabashes The first day of January 1685. we went from Tomaco towards Gallo We carried the Knight with us and two small Canoas which we took there and while we were rowing over one of our Canoas took a Pacquet Boat that was sent from Panama to Lima. The Spaniards threw the Pacquet of Letters over board with a Line and a Buoy to it but our Men seeing it took it up and brought the Letters and all the Prisoners aboard our Ships that were then at an anchor at Gallo Here we staid till the 6th day reading the Letters by which we understood that the Armada from Old Spain was come to Portabel and that the President of Panama had sent this Pacquet on purpose to hasten the Plate Fleet thither from Lima. We were very joyful of this News and therefore sent away the Pacquet Boat with all her Letters and we altered our former resolutions of going to Lavelia We now concluded to careen our Ships as speedily as we could that we might be ready to intercept this Fleet. The properest place that we could think on for doing it was among the Kings Islands or Pearl Keys because they are near Panama and all Ships bound to Panama from the Coast of Lima pass by them so that being there we could not possibly miss the Fleet. According to these resolutions we sailed the next morning in order to execute what we designed
Besides these there are an infinite number of small Islands of no account and even the great Islands many of them are without Names or at least so variously set down that I find the same Islands named by divers Names The Island St. John and Mindanao are the Southern-most of all these Islands and are the only Islands in all this Range that are not subject to the Spaniards St. Johns Island is on the East side of the Mindanao and distant from it 3 or 4 leagues It is in lat about 7 or 8 North. This Island is in length about 38 leagues stretching N. N. W. and S. S. E. and it is in breadth about 24 leagues in the middle of the Island The Northermost end is broader and the Southermost is narrower This Island is of a good heighth and is full of many small hills The Land at the South East end where I was ashore is of a black fat mould and the whole Island seems to partake of the same fatness by the vast number of large Trees that it produceth for it looks all over like one great Grove As we were passing by the S. E. end we saw a Canoa of the Natives under the shore therefore one of our Canoas went after to have spoken with her but she run away from us seeing themselves chaced put their Canoa ashore leaving her fled into the Woods nor would be allured to come to us altho we did what we could to entice them besides these Men we saw no more here nor sign of any Inhabitants at this end When we came aboard our Ship again we steered away for the Island Mindanao which was now fair in sight of us it being about 10 leagues distant from this part of St. Johns The 22d day we came within a league of the East side of the Island Mindanao and having the Wind at S. E. we steered toward the North end keeping on the East side till we came into the lat of 7d 40 m. and there we anchored in a small Bay about a mile from the shore in 10 fathom Water rocky foul ground Some of our Books gave us an account that Mindanao City and Isle lies in 7d 40 m. we guest that the middle of the Island might lye in this lat but we were at a great loss where to find the City whether on the East or West side Indeed had it been a small Island lying open to the Eastern Wind we might probably have searched first on the West side for commonly the Islands within the Tropicks or within the bounds of the Trade-Winds have their Harbours on the West sido as best sheltered but the Island Mindanao being guarded on the East side by St. Johns Island we might as reasonably expect to find the Harbour and City on this side as any where else but coming into the lat in which we judg'd the City might be found no Canoas or People that might give as any umbrage of a City or place of Trade near at hand though we coasted within a league of the shore The Island Mindanao is the biggest of all the Philippine Islands except Luconia It is about 60 leagues long and 40 or 50 broad The South end is in about 5 d. N. and the N. W. end reacheth almost to 8 d. N. It is a very mountainous Island full of Hills and Valleys The Mould in general is deep and black and extraordinary fat and fruitful The sides of the Hills are stony yet productive enough of very large tall Trees In the heart of the Country there are some Mountains that yield good Gold The Valleys are well moistned with pleasant Brooks and small Rivers of delicate Water and have Trees of divers sorts flourishing and green all the year The Trees in general are very large and most of them are of kinds unknown to us There is one sort which deserves particular notice called by the Natives Libby Trees These grow wild in great Groves of 5 or 6 mile long by the sides of the Rivers Of these Trees Sago is made which the poor Country People eat instead of Bread 3 or 4 months in the year This Tree for its body and shape is much like the Palmeto tree or the Cabbage tree but not so tall as the latter The Bark and Wood is hard and thin like a Shell and full of white Pith like the Pith of an Elder This Tree they cut down and split it in the middle and scrape out all the Pith which they beat lustily with a wooden Pestle in a great Mortar or Trough and then put into a Cloth or Strainer held over a Trough and pouring Water in among the Pith they stir it about in the Cloth so the Water carries all the substance of the Pith through the Cloth down into the Trough leaving nothing in the Cloth but a light sort of Husk which they throw away but that which falls into the Trough settles in a short time to the bottom like Mud and then they draw off the Water and take up the muddy substance wherewith they make Cakes which being baked proves very good Bread The Mindanao People live 3 or 4 months of the year on this food for their Bread kind The Native Indians of Teranate and Tidore and all the Spice Islands have plenty of these Trees and use them for food in the same manner as I have been inform'd by Mr. Caril Rofy who is now Commander of one of the Kings Ships He was one of our company at this time and being left with Captain Swan at Mindanao went afterwards to Teranate and lived there among the Dutch a year or two The Sago which is transported into other parts of the East Indies is dried in small pieces like little Seeds or Comfits and commonly eaten with Milk of Almonds by those that are troubled with the Flux for it is a great binder and very good in that distemper In some places of Mindanao there is plenty of Rice but in the hilly Land they plant Yams Potatoes and Pumkins all which thrive very well The other Fruits of this Island are Water-Melons Musk-Melons Plantains Bonanoes Guava's Nutmegs Cloves Betel-nuts Durians Jacks or Jaca's Coco-nuts Oranges c. The Plantain I take to be the King of all Fruit not except the Coco it self The Tree that bears this Fruit is about 3 foot or 3 foot and an half round and about 10 or 12 foot high These Trees are not raised from seed for they seem not to have any but from the roots of other old Trees If these young suckers are taken out of the ground and planted in another place it will be 15 months before they bear but if let stand in their own native Soil they will bear in 12 months As soon as the Fruit is ripe the Tree decays but then there are many young ones growing up to supply its place When this Tree first springs out of the ground it comes up with 2 leaves and by that time it is a foot
for the Europeans coming Eastward by the Cape of Good Hope in a course contrary to the Sun and us where-ever we met they were a full day before us in their Accounts So among the Indian Mahometans here their Friday the day of their Sultans going to their Mosques was Thursday with us though it were Friday also with those who came Eastward from Europe Yet at the Ladrone Islands we found the Spaniards of Guam keeping the same computation with our selves the reason of which I take to be that they settled that Colony by a course Westward from Spain the Spaniards going first to America and thence to the Ladrones and Philippines But how the reckoning was at Manila and the rest of the Spanish Colonies in the Philippine Islands I know not whether they keep it as they brought it or corrected it by the Accounts of the Natives and of the Portuguese Dutch and English coming the contrary way from Europe One great reason why Seamen ought to keep the difference of time as exact as they can is that they may be the more exact in their Lo ngitude For our Tables of the Suns declination being calculated for the Meridians of the places in which they were made differ about 12 minutes from those parts of the World that lie on their opposite Meridians in the months of March and September and in proportion to the Suns declination at other times of the year also And should they run farther as we did the difference would still increase upon them and be an occasion of great errours Yet even able Seamen in these Voyages are hardly made sensible of this tho so necessary to be observed for want of duly attending to the reason of it as it happened among those of our crew who after we had past 180 degrees began to decrease the difference of declination whereas they ought still to have increased it for it all the way increased upon us We had the Wind at N. N. E. fair clear Weather and a brisk gale We coasted to the West-ward on the South side of the Island Mindanao keeping within 4 or 5 leagues of the shore The Land from hence trends away W. by S. It is of a good heighth by the Sea and very Woody and in the Country we say high Hills The next day we were abrest off Chambongo a Town in this Island and 30 leagues from the River of Mindanao Here is said to be a good Harbour and a great settlement with plenty of Beef and Buffaloe It is reported that the Spaniards were formerly fortified here also There are 2 shoals lie off this place 2 or 3 leagues from the shore From hence the Land is more low and even yet there are some Hills in the Country About 6 leagues before we came to the West end of the Island Mindanao we fell in with a great many small low Islands or Keys and about 2 or 3 leagues to the Southward of these Keys there is a long Island stretching N. E. and S. W. about 12 leagues This Island is low by the Sea on the North side and has a ridge of Hills in the middle running from one end to the other Between this Island and the small Keys there is a good large Channel Among the Keys also there is good depth of Water and a violent Tide but on what point of the compass it flows I know not nor how much it riseth and falls The 17th day we anchored on the East side of all these Keys in 8 fathom water clean Sand. Here are plenty of green Turtle whose flesh is as sweet as any in the West Indies but they are very shy A little to the Westward of these Keys on the Island Mindanan we saw abundance of Coco-nut Trees Therefore we sent our Canoa ashore thinking to find Inhabitants but found none nor sign of any but great tracks of Hogs and great Cattle and close by the Sea there were the ruins of an old Fort. The Walls thereof were of a good heighth built with Stone and Lime and by the Wokrmanship seem'd to be Spanish From this place the Land trends W. N. W. and is of an indifferent heighth by the Sea It run on this point of the Compass 4 or 5 leagues and then the Land trends away N. N. W. 5 or 6 leagues farther making with many bluff points We weigh'd again the 14th day and went thro between the Keys but met such uncertain Tydes that we were forced to anchor again The 22d day we got about the Westermost point of all Mindanao and stood to the Northward plying under the shore and having the Wind at N. N. E. a fresh gale As we sailed along further we found the Land to trend N. N. E. On this part of the Island the Land is high by the Sea with full bluff points and very Woody There are some small sandy Bays which afford streams of fresh Water Here we met with two Proe's belonging to the 〈◊〉 one of the Mindanaian Nations before mentioned They came from Manila laden with Silks and Calicoes We kept on this Western part of the Island steering Northerly till we came abrest of some other of the Philippine Islands that lay to the Northward of us then steered away towards them but still keeping on the West side of them and we had the Winds at N. N. E. The 3d of February we anchored in a good bay on the West side of an Island in lat 9 d. 55 m. where we had 13 fathom Water good soft oaze This Island hath no name that we could find in any book but lieth on the West side of Island Sebo It is about 8 or 10 leagues long Mountainous and Woody At this place Captain Read who was the same Captain Swan had so much railed against in his Journal and was now made Captain in his room as Captain Teat was made Master and Mr. Henry More Quartermaster ordered the Carpenters to cut down our Quarter Deck to make the Ship snug and the fitter for sailing When that was done we heeled her scrubbed her bottom and tallowed it Then we fill'd all our Water for here is a delicate small run of Water The Land was pretty low in this Bay the Mould black and fat and the Trees of several kinds very thick and tall In some places we found plenty of Canes such as we use in England for Walking-canes These were short jointed not above two foot and a half or two foot ten inches the longest and most of them not above two foot They run along on the ground like a Vine or taking hold of the Trees they climb up to their very tops They are 15 or 20 fathom long and much of a bigness from the root till within 5 or 6 fathom of the end They are of a pale green colour cloathed over with a coat of a short thick hairy substance of a dun colour but it comes off by only drawing the Cane thro your hand We did cut many of them
and they proved very tough heavy Canes We saw no Houses nor sign of Inhabitants but while we lay here there was a Canoa with 6 men came into this Bay but whether they were bound or from whence they came I know not They were Indians and we could not understand them In the middle of this Bay about a mile from the shore there is small low woody Island not above a mile in circumference our Ship rode about a mile from it This Island was the habitation of an incredible number of great Batts with bodies as big as Ducks or larger Fowl and with vast Wings For I saw at Mindanao one of this sort and I judge that the Wings stretcht out in length could not be less asunder than 7 or 8 foot from tip to tip for it was much more than any of us could fathom with our Arms extended to the utmost The Wings are for substance like those of other Batts of a dun or mouse colour The Skin or Leather of them hath Ribs running along it and draws up in 3 or 4 folds and at the joints of those Ribs and the extremities of the Wings there are sharp crooked Claws by which they may hang on any thing In the evening as soon as the Sun was set these Creatures would begin to take their flight from this Island in swarms like Bees directing their flight over to the main Island and whether afterwards I know not Thus we should see them rising up from the Island till night hindred our sight and in the morning as soon as it was light we should see them returning again like a Cloud to the small Island till Sun rising This course they kept constantly while we lay here affording us every morning and evening an hours diversion in gazing at them and talking about them but our curiosity did not prevail with us to go ashore to them our selves and Canoas being all the day time taken up in business about our Ship At this Isle also we found plenty of Turtle and Manatee but no Fish We stay'd here till the 10th of February 1687 and then having compleated our business we sailed hence with the Wind at North. But going out we struck on a Rock where we lay two hours It was very smooth Water and the Tide of flood or else we should there have lost our Ship We struck off a great piece of our Rudder which was all the damage that we received but we more narrowly mist losing our Ship this time than in any other in the whole Voyage This is a very dangerous Shoal because it does not break unless probably it may appear in foul weather It lies about two mile to the Westward without the small Batt Island Here we found the Tide of flood setting to the Southward and the Ebb to the Northward After we were past this Shoal we coasted along by the rest of the Philippine Islands keeping on the West side of them Some of them appeared to be very Mountainous dry Land We saw many fires in the night as we passed by Panay a great Island settled by Spaniards and by the fires up and down it seems to be well settled by them for this is a Spanish custom whereby they give notice of any danger or the like from Sea and 't is probable they had seen our Ship the day before This is an unfrequented Coast and 't is rare to have any Ship seen there We touched not at Panay nor any where else tho we saw a great many small Islands to the Westward of us and some Shoals but none of them laid down in our draughts The 18th day of Feb. we anchored at the N. W. end of the Island Mindora in 10 fathom Water about 3 quarters of a mile from the shore Mindora is a large Island the middle of it lying in lat 13 about 40 leagues long stretching N. W. and S. E. It is high and Mountainous and not very woody At this place where we anchored the Land was neither very high nor low There was a small Brook of Water and the Land by the Sea was very woody and the Trees high and tall but a league or two farther in the Woods are very thin and small Here we saw great tracks of Hogs and Beef and we saw some of each and hunted them but they were wild and we could kill none While we were here there was a Canoa with 4 Indians came from Manila They were very shie of us a while but at last hearing us speak Spanish they came to us and told us that they were going to a Frier that liv'd at an Indian Village towards the S. E. end of the Island They told us also that the Harbour of Manila is seldom or never without 20 or 30 Sail of Vessels most Chinese some Portugueze and some few the Spaniards have of their own They said that when they had done their business with the Frier they would return to Manila and hoped to be back again at this place in 4 days time We told them that we came for a Trade with the Spaniards at Manila and should be glad if they would carry a Letter to some Merchant there which they promised to do But this was only a pretence of ours to get out of them what intelligence we could as to their Shipping Strength and the like under colour of seeking a Trade for our business was to pillage Now if we had really designed to have traded here this was as fair an opportunity as Men could have desired for these men could have brought us to the Frier that they were going to and a small Present to him would have engaged him to do any kindness for us in the way of Trade for the Spanish Governors do not allow of it and we must Trade by stealth The 21st day we went from hence with the wind at E. N. E. a small gale The 23d day in the morning we were fair by the S. E. end of the Island Luconia the place that had been so long desired by us We presently saw a Sail coming from the Northward and making after her we took her in 2 hours time She was a Spanish Bark that came from a place called Pangasanam a small Town on the N. end of Luconia as they told us probably the same with Pongassinay which lies on a Bay at the N. W. side of the Island She was bound to Manila but had no Goods aboard and therefore we turned her away The 23d we took another Spanish Vessel that came from the same place as the other She was laden with Rice and Cotton-cloath and bound for Manila also These Goods were purposely for the Acapulco Ship the Rice was for the Men to live on while they lay there and in their return and the Cotton-cloath was to make Sails The Master of this Prize was Boatswain of the Acapulco Ship which escaped us at Guam and was now at Manila It was this Man that gave us the relation of what
strength it had how they were afraid of us there and of the accident that happen'd to them as is before mentioned in the 10th Chapter We took these two Vessels within 7 or 8 leagues of Manila Luconia I have spoken of already but I shall now add this further account of it It is a great Island taking up between 6 and 7 degrees of Lat. in length and its breadth near the middle is about 60 leagues but the ends are narrow The North end lies in about 19 d. North Lat. and the S. end in about 12 d. 30 m. This great Island hath abundance of small Keys or Islands lying about it especially at the North end The South side fronts towards the rest of the Philippine Islands of these that are its nearest Neighbours Mindora lately mentioned is the chief and gives name to the Sea or Streight that parts it and the other Islands from Luconia being called the Streights of Mindora A Prospect of y e Coast of y e I. Luconia near Manila at 6 L. off Shore y e highest Pike bearing East Thus the Islands Pulo Condor appear at 8 L. distance bearing South It is pretty well inhabited with Indians most of them if not all under the Spaniards who now are masters of it The Native Indians do live together in Towns and they have Priests among them to instruct them in the Spanish Religion Manila the chief or perhaps only City lies at the foot of a ridge of high Hills facing upon a spacious harbour near the S. W. point of the Island in about the Lat. of 14 d. North. It is environ'd with a high strong Wall and very well fortify'd with Forts and Breastworks The Houses are large strongly built and covered with Pan-tile The Streets are large and pretty regular with a Parade in the midst after the Spanish fashion There a great many fair Buildings besides Churches and other Religious houses of which there are not a few The Harbour is so large that some hundreds of Ships may ride here and is never without many both of their own and strangers I have already given you an account of the two Ships going and coming between this place and Acapulco Besides them they have some small Vessels of their own and they do allow the Portuguese to Trade here but the Chinese are the chiefest Merchants and they drive the greatest Trade for they have commonly 20 or 30 or 40 Jonks in the Harbour at a time and a great many Merchants constantly residing in the City beside Shop-keepers and Handy-crafts men in abundance Small Vessels run up near the Town but the Acapulco Ships and others of greater burthen lye a league short of it where there is a strong Fort also and Store-houses to put Goods in I had the major part of this relation 2 or 3 years after this time from Mr. Coppinger our Surgeon for he made a Voyage hither from Porta Nova a Town on the Coast of Coromandel in a Portugueze Ship as I think Here he found 10 or 12 of Captain Swan's men some of those that we left at Mindanao For after we came from thence they bought a Proe there by the instigation of an Irish-man who went by the name of John Fitz-Gerald a person that spoke Spanish very well and so in this their Proe they came hither They had been here but 18 months when Mr. Coppinger arrived here and Mr. Fitz-Gerald had in this time gotten a Spanish Mustesa Woman to Wife and a good Dowry with her He then professed Physick and Surgery and was highly esteemed among the Spaniards for his supposed Knowledge in those Arts For being always troubled with sore Shins while he was with us he kept some Plaisters and Salves by him and with these he set up upon his bare natural stock of knowledge and his Experience in Kibes But then he had a very great stock of confidence withal to help out the other and being an Irish Roman Catholick and having the Spanish Language he had a great advantage of all his Consorts and he alone lived well there of them all We were not within sight of this Town but I was shewn the Hills that over-looked it and drew a draft of them as we lay off at Sea which I have caused to be ingraven among a few others that I took my self See the Table The time of the year being now too far spent to do any thing here it was concluded to sail from hence to Pulo Condore a little parcel of Islands on the Coast of Cambodia and carry this prize with us and there careen if we could find any convenient place for it designing to return hither again by the latter end of May and wait for the Acapulco Ship that comes about that time By our Drafts which we were guided by being strangers to these parts this seemed to us then to be a place out of the way where we might lye snug for a while and wait the time of returning for our prey For we avoided as much as we could the going to lye by at any great place of Commerce lest we should become too much exposed and perhaps be assulted by a force greater than our own So having set our Prisoners ashore we sailed from Luconia the 26th day of Feb. with the Wind E. N. E. and fair weather and a brisk gale We were in lat 14d N. when we began to steer away for Pulo Condore and we steered S. by W. In our way thither we went pretty near the Shoals of Pracel and other Shoals which are very dangerous We were very much afraid of them but escaped them without so much as seeing them only at the very South end of the Pracel Shoals we saw 3 little sandy Islands or Spots of Sand standing just above water within a mile of us It was the 13th day of March before we came in sight of Pulo Condore or the Island Condore as Pulo signifies The 14th day about noon we anchored on the North side of the Island against a sandy Bay 2 mile from the shore in 10 fathom clean hard Sand with both Ship and Prize Pulo Condore is the principal of a heap of Islands and the only inhabited one of them They lye in lat 8 d. 40. m. North and about 20 leagues South and by East from the mouth of the River of Cambodia These Islands lye so near together that at a distance they appear to be but one Island Two of these Islands are pretty large and of a good heighth they may be seen 14 or 15 leagues at Sea the rest are but little Spots The biggest of the two which is the inhabited one is about 4 or 5 leagues long and lies East and West It is not above 3 mile broad at the broadest place in most places not above a mile wide The other large Island is about 3 mile long and half a mile wide This Island stretcheth N. and S. It is so conveniently placed at the West end
Besides this present from the Governour there was a Captain of a Jonk sent two Jars of Arack and abundance of Pine-apples and Water-melons Captain Read sent ashore as a Present to the Governour a curious Spanish Silver-hilted Rapier an English Carbine and a Gold Chain and when the Officer went ashore three Guns were fired In the afternoon the Governour sent off the same Officer again to complement the Captain for his civility and promised to retaliate his kindness before we departed but we had such blustring weather afterward that no Boat could come aboard We stayed here till the 29th day and then sailed from hence with the wind at S. W. and pretty fair weather We now directed our course for some Islands we had chosen to go to that lye between Formosa and Luconia They are laid down in our plots without any name only with a figure of 5 denoting the number of them It was supposed by us that these Islands had no Inhabitants because they had not any name by our Hydographers Therefore we thought to lye there secure and be pretty near the Island Luconia which we did still intend to visit In going to them we sailed by the South West end of Formosa leaving it on our larboard side This is a large Island the South end is in lat 21 d. 20 m. and the North end in 25 d. 10 m. North lat the longitude of this Isle is laid down from 142 d. 5 m. to 143 d. 16 m. reckoning East from the pike of Tenariffe so that 't is but narrow and the Tropick of Cancer crosses it It is a high and woody Island and was formerly well inhabited by the Chinese and was then frequently visited by English Merchants there being a very good Harbour to secure their Ships But since the Tartars have conquered China they have spoiled the Harbour as I have been informed to hinder the Chinese that were then in Rebellion from fortifying themselves there and ordered the foreign Merchants to come and trade on the Main The 6th day of August we arrived at the five Islands that we were bound to and anchored on the East side of the Northermost Island in 15 fathom a Cables length from the shore Here contrary to our expectation we found abundance of Inhabitants in sight for there were 3 large Towns all within a league of the Sea and another larger Town than any of the three on the back side of a small hill close by also as we found afterwards These Islands lye in lat 20 d. 20 m. North lat by my observation for I took it there and I find their Longitude according to our Drafts to be 141 d. 50 m. These Islands having no particular Names in the Drafts some or other of us made use of the Seamens priviledge to give them what names we pleased Three of the Islands were pretty large the Westermost is the biggest This the Dutch men who were among us called the Prince of Orange's Island in honour of his present Majesty It is about 7 or 8 leagues long and about 2 leagues wide and it lies almost N. and S. The other two great Islands are about 4 or 5 leagues to the Eastward of this The Northermost of them where we first anchored I called the D. of Grafton's Isle as soon as we landed on it having married my Wife out of his Dutchess's Family and leaving her at Arlington house at my going aboard This Isle is about 4 leagues long and one league and a half wide stretching North and South The other great Isle our Seamen called the Duke of Monmouth's Island This is about a league to the Southward of Grafton Isle It is about 3 leagues long and a league wide lying as the other Between Monmouth and the South end of Orange Island there are two small Islands of a roundish form lying East and West The Eastermost Island of the two our men unanimously called Bashee Island from a Liquor which we drank there plentifully every day after we came to an anchor at it The other which is the smallest of all we called Goat Island from the great number of Goats there and to the Northward of them all are two high Rocks Orange Island which is the biggest of them all is not inhabited It is high Land flat and even on the top with steep cliffs against the Sea for which reason we could not go ashore there as we did on all the rest I have made it my general observation that where the Land is fenced with steep Rocks and Cliffs against the Sea there the Sea is very deep and seldom affords anchor ground and on the other side where the Land falls away with a declivity into the Sea altho the Land be exrraordinary high within yet there are commonly good soundings and consequently anchoring and as the visible declivity of the Land appears near or at the edge of the Water whether pretty steep or more sloping so we commonly find our anchor ground to be more or less deep or steep therefore we came nearer the shore or anchor farther off as we see convenient for there is no Coast in the World that I know or have heard of where the Land is of a continual heighth without some small Valleys or declivities which lye intermixt with the high Land They are these subsidings of Valleys or low Lands that make dents in the shore and Creeks small Bays and Harbours or little Coves c. which afford good anchoring the surface of the Earth being there lodged deep under Water Thus we find many good Harbours on such Coasts where the Land bounds the Sea with steep Clifs by reason of the Declivities or subsiding of the Land between these Cliffs But where the Declension from the Hills or Cliffs is not within Land between Hill and Hill but as on the Coast of Chili and Peru the Declivity is toward the Main Sea or into it the Coast being perpendicular or very steep from the neighbouring Hills as in those Countries from the Andes that run along the shore there is a deep Sea and few or no Harbours or Creeks All that Coast is too steep for anchoring and hath the fewest Roads fit for Ships of any Coast I know The Coasts of Gallicia Portugal Norway and Newfoundland c. are Coasts like the Peruvian and the high Islands of the Archipelago but yet not so scanty of good Harbours for where there are short Ridges of Land there are good Bays at the extremities of those Ridges where they plunge into the Sea as on the Coast of Caraccos c. The Island of John Fernando and the Island St. Helena c. are such high Land with deep shore and in general the plunging of any Land under Water seems to be in proportion to the rising of its continuous part above Water more or less steep and it must be a bottom almost level or very gently declining that affords good anchoring Ships being soon driven from their Moorings on
men that was left ashore I shall speak more of him hereafter He and the rest of them told me that after the Ship was out of sight the Natives began to be more kind to them than they had been before and perswaded them to cut their Hair short as theirs was offering to each of them if they would do it a young Woman to Wife and a small Hatchet and other Iron Utenfils fit for a Planter in Dowry and withal shewed them a piece of Land for them to manage They were courted thus by several of the Town where they then were but they took up their head-quarters at the house of him with whom they first went ashore When the Ship appeared in sight again then they importuned them for some Iron which is the chief thing that they covet even above their Ear-rings We might have bought all their Ear-rings or other Gold they had with our Iron-bars had we been assur'd of its goodness and yet when it was touch'd and compared with other Gold we could not discern any difference tho it look'd so pale in the lump but the seeing them polish it so often was a new discouragement This last Storm put our Men quite out of heart for although it was not altogether so fierce as that which we were in on the Coast of China which was still fresh in memory yet it wrought more powerfully and frighted them from their design of cruising before Manila fearing another Storm there Now every Man wisht himself at home as they had done an hundred times before but Captain Reed and Captain Teat the Master perswaded them to go towards Cape Comorin and then they would tell them more of their minds intending doubtless to cruize in the Red Sea and they easily prevailed with the Crew The Eastern Monsoon was now at hand and the best way had been to go through the Streights of Malacca but Captain Teat said it was dangerous by reason of many Islands and Shoals there with which none of us were acquainted Therefore he thought it best to go round on the East side of all the Philippine Islands and so keeping South toward the Spice Islands to pass out into the East Indian Ocean about the Island Timor This seemed to be a very tedious way about and as dangerous altogether for Sholes but not for meeting with English or Dutch Ships which was their greatest fear I was well enough satisfied knowing that the farther we went the more Knowledge and Experience I should get which was the main thing that I regarded and should also have the more variety of places to attempt an Escape from them being fully resolv'd to take the first opportunity of giving them the slip CHAP. XVI They depart from the Bashee Islands and passing by some others and the N. End of Luconia St. John's Isle and other of the Philippines they stop at the two Isles near Mindanao where they re-fit their Ship and make a Pump after the Spanish fashion By the young Prince of the Spice-Island they have News of Captain Swan and his men left at Mindanao The Author proposes to the Crew to return to him but in vain the story of his Murder at Mindanao The Clove-Islands Ternate Tidore c. The Island Celebes and Dutch Town of Macasser They Coast along the East side of Celebes and between it and other Islands and Sholes with great Difficulty Shy Turtle Vast Cookles A wild Vine of great Virtue for Sores Great Trees one excessively big Beacons instead of Buoys on the Sholes A Spout a Description of them with a story of one Uncertain Tornadoes Turtle The Island Bouton and its chief Town and Harbour Callasusung The Inhabitants Visits given and receiv'd by the Sultan His Device in the Flag of his Proe his Guards Habit and Children Their Commerce Their different esteem as they pretend of the English and Dutch Maritime Indians sell others for Slaves Their Reception in the Town A Boy with 4 Rows of Teeth Parakites Crockadores a sort of White Parrots They pass among other Inhabited Islands Omba Pentare Timor c. Sholes New-Holland laid down too much Northward It s Soil and Dragon trees The poor Winking Inhabitants their Features Habit Food Arms c. The way of fetching Fire out of Wood. The Inhabitants on the Islands Their Habitations Unfitness for Labour c. The great Tides here They design for the Island Cocos and Cape Comorin THE third day of October 1687. we sailed from these Islands standing to the Southward intending to sail through among the Spice Islands We had fair weather and the wind at West We first steered S. S. W. and passed close by certain small Islands that lye just by the North end of the Island Luconia We left them all on the West of us and past on the East side of it and the rest of the Philippine Islands coasting to rhe Southward The N. East end of the Island Luconia appears to be good Champion Land of an indifferent heighth plain and even for many leagues only it has some pretty high Hills standing upright by themselves in these Plains but no ridges of Hills or chains of Mountains joyning one to another The Land on this side seems to be most Savannah or Pasture The S. E. part is more Mountainous and Woody Leaving the Island Luconia and with it our Golden projects we sailed on the Southward passing on the East side of the rest of the Philippine Islands These appear to be more Mountainous and less Woody till we came in sight of the Island St. John the first of that name I mentioned the other I spake of on the Coast of China This I have already described to be a very woody Island Here the Wind coming Southerly forced us to keep farther from the Islands The 14th day of October we came close by a small low Woody Island that lyeth East from the S. E. end of Mindanao distant from it about 20 leagues I do not find it set down in any Sea-Chart The 15th day we had the Wind at N. E. and we steered West for the Island Mindanao and arrived at the S. E. end again on the 16th day There we went in and anchored between two small Islands which lye in about 5 d. 10 m. N. Lat. I mentioned them when we first came on this Coast. Here we found a fine small Cove on the N. W. end of the Eastermost Island fit to Careen in or hale ashore so we went in there and presently unrigged our Ship and provided to hale our Ship ashore to clean her bottom These Islands are about 3 or 4 leagues from the Island Mindanao they are about 4 or 5 miles in circumference and of a pretty good heighth The mold is black and deep and there are two small Brooks of fresh Water They are both plentifully stored with great high Trees therefore our Carpenters were sent ashore to cut down some of them for our use for here they made a new Boltsprit
which we did set here also our old one being very faulty They made a new Fore-Yard too and a Fore Top-Mast and our Pumps being faulty and not serviceable they did cut a Tree to make a Pump They first squared it then sawed it in the middle and then hollowed each side exactly The two hollow sides were made big enough to contain a Pump-box in the midst of them both when they were joyned together and it required their utmost skill to close them exactly to the making a tight Cylinder for the Pump-box being unaccustomed to such work We learnt this way of Pump-making from the Spaniards who make their Pumps that they use in their Ships in the South Seas after this manner and I am confident that there are no better Hand-pumps in the world than they have While we lay here the young Prince that I mentioned in Chapter the 13th came aboard He understanding that we were bound farther to the Southward desired us to transport him and his Men to his own Island He shewed it to us in our Draft and told us the Name of it which we put down in our Draft for it was not named there but I quite forgot to put it into my Journal This Man told us that not above 6 days before this he saw Captain Swan and several of his Men that we left there and named the Names of some of them who he said were all well and that now they were at the City of Mindanao but that they had been all of them out with Raja Laut fighting under him in his Wars against his Enemies the Alfoores and that most of them fought with undaunted Courage for which they were highly honored and esteemed as well by the Sultan as by the General Raja Laut That now Captain Swan intended to go with his Men to Fort St. George and that in order thereto he had proffered 40 ounces of Gold for a Ship but the Owner and he were not yet agreed and that he feared that the Sultan would not let go away till the Wars were ended All this the Prince told us in the Malayan tongue which many of us had learnt and when he went away he promised to return to us again in 3 days time and so long Captain Reed promised to stay for him for we had now almost finished our business and he seem'd very glad of the opportunity of going with us After this I endeavoured to perswade our Men to return with the Ship to the River of Mandanao and offer their service again to Captain Swan I took an opportunity when they were filling of Water there being then half the Ships Company ashore and I found these all very willing to do it I desired them to say nothing till I had tried the minds of the other half which I intended to do the next day it being their turn to fill Water then but one of these Men who seemed most forward to invite back Captain Swan told Captain Read and Captain Teat of the project and they presently disswaded the Men from any such designs Yet fearing the worst they made all possible haste to be gone I have since been informed that Captain Swan and his Men stayed there a great while afterward and that many of the Men got passage from thence in Dutch Sloops to Ternate particularly Mr. Rofy and Mr. Nelly There they remained a great while and at last got to Batavia where the Dutch took their Journals from them and so to Europe and that some of Captain Swan's Men died at Mindanao of which number Mr. Harthope and Mr. Smith Captain Swan's Merchants were two At last Captain Swan and his Surgeon going in a small Canoa aboard of a Dutch Ship then in the Road in order to get passage to Europe were overset by the Natives at the Mouth of the River who waited their coming purposely to do it but unsuspected by them where they both were kill'd in the Water This was done by the General 's Order as some think to get his Gold which he did immediately seize on Others say it was because the General 's House was burnt a little before and Captain Swan was suspected to be the Author of it and others say that it was Captain Swan's Threats occasioned his own Ruine for he would often say passionately that he had been abused by the General and that he would have satisfaction for it saying also that now he was well acquainted with their Rivers and knew how to come in at any time that he also knew their manner of fighting and the Weakness of their Country and therefore he wou'd go away and get a Band of Men to assist him and returning thither again he would spoil and take all that they had and their Country too When the General has been informed of these discourses he would say What is Captain Swan made of Iron and able to resist a whole Kingdom Or does he think that we are afraid of him that he speaks thus Yet did he never touch him till now the Mindanayans kill'd him It is very probable there might be somewhat of truth in all of this for the Captain was passionate and the General greedy of Gold But whatever was the occasion so he was kill'd as several have assured me and his Gold seiz'd on and all his things and his Journal also from England as far as Cape Corrientes on the Coast of Mexico This Journal was afterwards sent away from thence by Mr. Moody who was there both a little before and a little after the Murder and he sent it to England by Mr. Goddard Chief Mate of the Defence But to our purpose seeing I could not perswade them to go to Captain Swan again I had a great desire to have had the Prince's company but Captain Read was afraid to let his fickle crew lye long That very day that the Prince had promised to return to us which was November 2. 1687. we sailed hence directing our course South West and having the Wind at N. W. This Wind continued till we came in sight of the Island Celebes then it veered about to the W. and to the Southward of the West We came up with the N. E. end of the Island Celebes the 9th day and there we found the current setting to the Westward so strongly that we could hardly get on the East side of that Island The Island Celebes is a very large Island extended in length from North to South about 7 degrees of lat and in breadth it is about 3 degrees It lies under the Equator the North end being in lat 1 d. 30 m. North and the South end in lat 5 d. 30 m. South and by common account the North point in the bulk of this Island lies nearest North and South but at the North East end there runs out a long narrow point stretching N. E. about 30 leagues and about 30 leagues to the Eastward of this long Slipe is the Island Gilolo on the West
side of which are 4 small Islands close by it which are very well stored with Cloves The two chiefest are Ternate and Tidore and as the Isle of Ceylon is reckoned the only place for Cinnamon and that of Banda for Nutmegs so these are thought by some to be the only Clove Islands in the World but this is a great error as I have already shewn At the South end of the Island Celebes there is a Sea or Gulph of about 7 or 8 leagues wide and 40 or 50 long which runs up the Countrey almost directly to the North and this Gulph hath several small Islands along the middle of it On the West side of the Island almost at the South end of it the Town of Macasser is seated A Town of great Strength and Trade belonging to the Dutch There are great Inlets and Lakes on the East side of the Island as also abundance of small Islands and sholes lying scattered about it We saw a high peeked Hill at the N. end but the Land on the East side is low all along for we cruized almost the length of it The mold on this side is black and deep and extraordinary fat and rich and full of Trees and there are many Brooks of Water run out into the Sea Indeed all this East side of the Island seems to be but one large Grove of extraordinary great high Trees Having with much ado got on this East side coasting along to the Southward and yet having but little Wind and even that little against us at S. S. W. and sometimes Calm we were a long time going about the Island The 22d day we were in Lat. 1 d. 20 m. South and being about 3 leagues from the Island standing to the Southward with a very gentle Land wind about 2 or 3 a clock in the morning we heard a clashing in the Water like Boats rowing and fearing some sudden attack we got up all our Arms and stood ready to defend our selves As soon as it was day we saw a great Proe built like the Mindanayan Proe's with about 60 men in her and 6 smaller Proe's They lay still about a mile to Windward of us to view us and probably design'd to make a prey of us when they first came out but they were now afraid to venture on us At last we shewed them Dutch Colours thinking thereby to allure them to come to us for we could not go to them but they presently rowed in toward the Island and went into a large opening and we saw them no more nor did we ever see any other Boats or Men but only one fishing Canoa while we were about this Island neither did we see any House on all the Coast. About 5 or 6 leagues to the South of this place there is a great Range of both large and small Islands and many shoals also that are not laid down in our Drafts which made it extreamly troublesom for us to get through But we past between them all and the Island Celebes and anchored against a sandy Bay in 8 fathom sandy ground about half a mile from the main Island being then in lat 1 d. 50 m. South Here we stayed several days and sent out our Canoas a striking of Turtle every day for here is great plenty of them but they were very shy as they were generally where-ever we found them in the East India Seas I know not the reason of it unless the Natives go very much a striking here for even in the West Indies they are shy in places that are much disturbed and yet on New Holland we found them shy as I shall relate though the Natives there do not molest them On the sholes without us we went and gathered Shell-fish at low water There were a monstrous sort of Cockles the Meat of one of them would suffice 7 or 8 Men. It was very good wholsom Meat We did also beat about in the Woods on the Island but found no game One of our Men who was always troubled with sore Legs found a certain Vine that supported it self by climbing about other Trees The leaves reach'd 6 or 7 feet high but the strings or branches 11 or 12. It had a very green leaf pretty broad and roundish and of a thick substance These leaves pounded small and boiled with Hogs Lard make an excellent Salve Our Men knowing the vertues of it stockt themselves here there was scarce a Man in the Ship but got a pound or two of it especially such as were troubled with old Ulcers who found great benefit by it This Man that discovered these leaves here had his first knowledge of them in the Isthmus of Darien he having had this Receipt from one of the Indians there and he had been ashore in divers places since purposely to seek these leaves but did never find any but here Among the many vast Trees hereabouts there was one exceeded all the rest This Captain Read caused to be cut down in order to make a Canoa having lost our Boats all but one small one in the late Storms so 6 lusty Men who had been Logwood cutters in the Bays of Campeachy and Honduras as Captain Read himself and many more of us had and so were very expert at this work undertook to fell it taking their turns 3 always cutting together and they were one whole day and half the next before they got it down This Tree though it grew in a Wood was yet 18 foot in circumference and 44 foot of clean body without knot or branch and even there it had no more than one or two branches and then ran clean again 10 foot higher there it spread it self into many great limbs and branches like an Oak very green and flourishing yet it was perisht at the heart which marr'd it for the service intended So leaving it and having no more business here we weighed and went from hence the next day it being the 29th day of November While we lay here we had some Tornadoes one or two every day and pretty fresh Land Winds which were at West The Sea breezes were small and uncertain sometimes out of the N. E. and so veering about to the East and South East We had the Wind at North East when we weighed and we steered off S. S. W. In the afternoon we saw a shole a head of us and altered our course to the S. S. E. In the evening at 4 a clock we were close by another great shole therefore we tackt and stood in for the Island Celebes again for fear of running on some of the sholes in the night By day a Man might avoid them well enough for they had all Beacons on them like Huts built on tall Posts above high-water mark probably set up by the Natives of the Island Celebes or those of some other neighbouring Islands and I never saw any such elsewhere In the night we had a violent Tornado out of the S. W. which lasted about an hour The 30th day
or 8 leagues from the Island Sumatra on the West side of it we saw abundance of Coco Nuts swimming in the Sea and we hoysed out our Boat and took up some of them as also a small Hatch or Scuttle rather belonging to some Bark The Nuts were very sound and the Kernel sweet and in some the Milk or Water in them was yet sweet and good The 13th day we came to a small Island called Triste in Lat. by observation 4 d. South it is about 14 or 15 leagues to the West of the Island Sumatra From hence to the Northward there are a great many small uninhabited Islands lying much at the same distance from Sumatra This Island Triste is not a mile round and so low that the Tide flows clear over it It is of a sandy soil and full of Coco-nut Trees The Nuts are but small yet sweet enough full and more ponderous than I ever felt any of that bigness notwithstanding that every Spring-tide the Salt water goes clear over the Island We sent ashore our Canoas for Coco-nuts and they return'd aboard laden with them three times Our Strikers also went out and struck some Fish which was boiled for Supper They also killed 2 young Aligators which we salted for the next day I had no opportunity at this place to make my Escape as I would have done and gone over hence to Sumatra could I have kept a Boat with me But there was no compassing this and so the 15th day we went from hence steering to the Northward on the West side of Sumatra Our Food now was Rice and the Meat of the Coco-nuts rasped and steep'd in water which made a sort of Milk into which we did put our Rice making a pleasant Mess enough After we parted from Triste we saw other small Islands that were also full of Coco-nut Trees The 19th day being in Lat. 3 d. 25 m. S. the S. W. point of the Island Nassau bore N. about 5 mile dist This is a pretty large uninhabited Island in Lat. 3 d. 20 m. S. and is full of high Trees About a mile from the Island Nassau there is a small Island full of Coco-nut Trees There we anchored the 20th day to replenish our stock of Coco-nut Trees A 〈◊〉 riff of Rocks lies almost round this Island so that our Boats could not go ashore nor come aboard at low water yet we got aboard 4 Boat loads of Nuts This Island is low like Triste and the anchoring is on the North side where you have 14 fathom a mile from shore clean sand The 21st day we went from hence and kept to the Northward coasting still on the West side of the Island Sumatra and having the winds between the W. and S. S. W. with unsettled weather sometimes Rains and Tornadoes and sometimes fair weather The 25th day we crost the Equator still coasting to the Northward between the Island Sumatra and a range of small Islands lying 14 or 15 leagues off it Among all these Islands Hog Island is the most considerable It lies in lat 3 d. 40. m. North. It is pretty high even Land cloathed with tall flourishing Trees we past by it the 28th day The 29th we saw a sail to the North of us which we chased but it being little wind we did not come up with her till the 30th day Then being within a league of her Captain Read went in a Canoa and took her and brought her aboard She was a Proe with 4 men in her belonging to Achin whither she was bound She came from one of these Coco-nut Islands that we past by and was laden with Coco-nuts and Goco-nut Oil. Captain Read ordered his men to take aboard all the Nuts and as much of the Oyl as he thought convenient and then cut a hole in the bottom of the Proe and turned her loose keeping the men Prisoners It was not for the lucre of the Cargo that Captain Read took this Boat but to hinder me and some others from going ashore for he knew that we were ready to make our escapes if an opportunity presented it self and he thought that by his abusing and robbing the Natives we should be afraid to trust our selves among them But yet this proceeding of his turned to our great advantage as shall be declared hereafter May the 1st we ran down by the North West end of the Island Sumatra within 7 or 8 leagues of the shore All this West side of Sumatra which we thus coasted along our Englishmen at Fort St. George call the West Coast simply without adding the name of Sumatra The Prisoners who were taken the day before shewed us the Islands that lye off of Achin Harbour and the Channels through which Ships go in and told us also that there was an English Factory at Achin I wisht my self there but was forced to wait with patience till my time was come We were now directing our course towards the Nicobar Islands intending there to clean the Ship 's bottom in order to make her sail well The 4th day in the evening we had sight of one of the Nicobar Islands The Southermost of them lies about 40 leagues N. N. W. from rhe N. W. end of the Island Sumatra This most Southerly of them is Nicobar it self but all the cluster of Islands lying South of the Audeman Islands are called by our Seamen the Nicobar Islands The Inhabitants of these Islands have no certain converse with any Nation but as Ships pass by them they will come aboard in their Proes and offer their Commodities to sale never inquiring of what Nation they are for all white people are alike to them Their chiefest Commodities are Ambergrease and Fruits Ambergrease is often found by the Native Indians of these Islands who know it very well as also know how to cheat ignorant Strangers with a certain mixture like it Several of our men bought such of them for a small purchase Captain Weldon also about this time touched at some of these Islands to the North of the Island where we lay and I saw a great deal of such Ambergrease that one of his men bought there but it was not good having no smell at all Yet I saw some there very good and fragrant At that Island where Captain Weldon was there were 2 Fryers sent thither to convert the Indians One of them came away with Captain Weldon the other remained there still He that came away with Captain Weldon gave a very good character of the Inhabitants of that Island viz. that they were very honest civil harmless People that they were not addicted to Quarrelling Theft or Murder that they did marry or at least live as Man and Wife one Man with one Woman never changing till Death made the separation that they were punctual and honest in performing their Bargains and that they were inclined to receive the Christian Religion This Relation I had afterwards from the mouth of a Priest at Tonqueen who told me that he
They keeping at a distance rowed away faster than we did and got to the Bay before us and there with about 20 more Canoas full of Men they all landed and stood to hinder us from landing But we rowed in within a hundred yards of them Then we lay still and I took my Gun and presented at them at which they all fell down flat on the ground But I turn'd my self about and to shew that we did not intend to harm them I fired my Gun off to Sea so that they might see the Shot graze on the water Assoon as my Gun was loaden again we rowed gently in at which some of them withdrew The rest standing up did still cut and hew the Air making signs of their hatred till I once more frighted them with my Gun and discharg'd it as before Then more of them sneak'd away leaving only 5 or 6 Men on the Bay Then we rowed in again and Mr. Hall taking his Sword in his hand leapt ashore and I stood ready with my Gun to fire at the Indians if they had injured him but they did not stir till he came to them and saluted them He shook them by the hand and by such signs of friendship as he made the Peace was concluded ratified and confirmed by all that were present and others that were gone were again call'd back and they all very joyfully accepted of a Peace This became universal over all the Island to the great joy of the Inhabitants There was no ringing of Bells nor Bonfires made for that is not the custom here but gladness appeared in their Countenances for now they could go out and fish again without fear of being taken This peace was not more welcom to them than to us for now the Inhabitants brought their Melory again to us which we bought for old Rags and small stripes of Cloath about as broad as the palm of ones hand I did not see above 5 or 6 Hens for they have but few on the Island At some places we saw some small Hogs which we could have bought of them reasonably but we would not offend our Achinese Friends who were Mahometans We stayed here 2 or 3 days and then rowed toward the South end of the Island keeping on the East side and we were kindly received by the Natives where ever we came When we arrived at the South end of the Island we fitted our selves with Melory and Water We bought 3 or 4 Loaves of Melory and about 12 large Coco-nut shells that had all the Kernel taken out yet were preserved whole except only a small hole at one end and all these held for us about 3 gallons and a half of Water We bought also 2 or 3 Bambo's that held about 4 or 5 gallons more This was our Sea store We now designed to go to Achin a Town on the N. W. end of the Island Sumatra distant from hence about 40 leagues bearing South South East We only waited for the western Monsoon which we had expected a great while and now it seemed to be at hand for the Clouds began to hang their heads to the Eastward and at last moved gently that way and though the Wind was still at East yet this was an infallible sign that the western Monsoon was nigh CHAP. XVIII The Author with some other puts to Sea in an open Boat designing for Achin Their Accommodations for their Voyage Change of Weather a Halo about the Sun and a violent storm Their great danger and distress Cudda a Town and Harbour on the Coast of Malacca Pulo Way Golden Mountain on the Isle of Sumatra River and Town of Passenge-Jonca on Sumatra near Diamond-point where they go ashore very sick and are kindly entertained by the Oromkay and Inhabitants They go thence to Achin The Author is examined before the Shabander and takes Physick of a Malayan Doctor His long illness He sets out towards Nicobar again but returns suddenly to Achin Road. He makes several Voyages thence to Tonqueen to Malacca to Fort St. George and to Bencouli an English Factory on Sumatra An account of the Ships Crew who set the Author ashore at Nicobar Some go to Trangambar a Danish Fort on Coromandel others to Fort St. George many to the Mogul's Camp Of the Peuns and how John Oliver made himself a Captain Captain Read with the rest having plundered a rich Portuguese Ship near Ceylon goes to Madagascar and Ships himself off thence in a New-york Ship The Traverses of the rest to Johanna c. Their Ship the Cygnet of London now lies sunk in Augustin Bay at Madagascar Of Prince Jeoly the Painted man whom the Author brought with him to England and who died at Oxford Of his Country the Isle of Meangis the Cloves there c. The Author is made Gunner of Bencouli but is forced to slip away from thence to come for England IT was the 15th day of May 1688 about 4 a clock in the afternoon when we left Nicobar Island directing our course toward Achin being 8 men of us in Company viz. 3 English 4 Malayans who were born at Achin and the mungrel Portuguese Our Vessel the Nicobar Canoa was not one of the biggest nor of the least size She was much about the burthen of one of our London Wherrys below Bridge and built sharp at both ends like the fore part of a Wherry She was deeper than a Wherry but not so broad and was so thin and light that when empty 4 men could launch her or hale her ashore on a sandy Bay We had a good substantial Mast and a mat Sail and good Outlagers lasht very fast and firm on each side the Vessel being made of strong poles So that while these continued firm the Vessel could not overset which she would easily have done without them and with them too had they not been made very strong and we were therefore much beholding to our Achinese Companions for this contrivance These men were none of them so sensible of the danger as Mr. Hall and my self for they all consided so much in us that they did not so much as scruple any thing that we did approve of Neither was Mr. Hall so well provided as I was for before we left the Ship I had purposely consulted our Draft of the East Indies for we had but one in the Ship and out of that I had written in my pocket-book an account of the bearing and distance of all the Malacca Coast and that of Sumatra Pegu and Siam and also brought away with me a pocket Compass for my direction in any enterprize that I should undertake The weather at our setting out was very fair clear and hot The Wind was still at S. E. a very small breeze just fanning the Air and the Clouds were moving gently from West to East which gave us hopes that the Winds were either at West already abroad at Sea or would be so in a very short time We took this opportunity of fair weather
d. North. It is much frequented by the Cochinchinese whose Country begins hereabouts bordering on the Kingdom of Champa They are most Fishermen that come hither and their chief business is to make Oyl of Porpusses for these Fish are found in great plenty here at some seasons of the year and then the Cochinchinese resort hither to take them The people that we found on Pulo Condore mentioned in the 14th Chapter of my Voyage round the World page 395 were of these Cochinchinese The Turtle also which they catch is chiefly in order to make Oyl of their fat and there is great store of Turtle on all this Coast. We coasted yet farther on this shore till we came to the Islands of Champello These may seem to have some affinity to Champa by the sound of the word which one would take to be a Portuguese diminutive of Champa yet they lye on the Cochinchina Coast and belong to it tho uninhabited They are 4 or 5 in number and lye 4 or 5 leagues from the shore They are called Champello de la Mar to distinguish them from others lying farther down in the Bay of Tonquin called Champello de Terra These last lye in about 16 d. 45 m. North but the Islands of Champello de la Mar lye in about 13 d. 45 m. N. Over against these last Islands on the Main there is a large navigable River empties itself into the Sea The City of Quinam stands on the banks of this River and is said to be the principal City of the Kingdom of Cochinchina As to its distance from the Sea its bigness strength riches c. I am yet in the dark only I have been inform'd that if a Ship is cast away on this Kingdom the Seamen that escape drowning and get ashore become Slaves to the King Captain John Tiler was thus served and despaired of ever getting his freedom but after a considerable stay there he was taken notice of by the King and upon promise of returning thither again to trade there he was sent away I sailed in a Vessel of his after this but I never found him inclined to Trade thither any more However notwithstanding this their severity to Shipwrackt people I have been informed by Captain Tiler and others that they have a desire to Trade tho' they are yet destitute of the means to attain it This desire of Trade they seem to have taken up from some Chinese fugitives who fled from the Tartars when they conquered their Country and being kindly received by these Cochinchinese and having among them many Artificers they instructed their kind protectors in many useful Arts of which they were wholly ignorant before 'T is probable this their custom of seizing Shipwrackt Seamen may soon vanish by the coming in of Trade which is already advancing among them for the Merchants of China do now drive some small traffick among these people and fetch thence some small quantities of Pepper Lignum Aloes and Aguala Wood which is much esteemed for its rare scent and is very valuable in other places of India They also fetch Betle from hence it growing here in great plenty I have had no account of any Shipping the Cochinchinese have of their own but I have met with them in their open Boats of 4 5 or 6 Tun imploying themselves chiefly in getting Pitch and Tar from Pulo Condore in fishing about the Coast and Island to get Oyl and in fetching Aguala Wood from the Bay of Siam which whether it grows there or no I can't tell but I have heard that 't is only drift wood cast ashore by the Sea The seizing Shipwrackt-men has been also a custom at Pegu but whether still continued I know not They lookt on such as men preserved by God purposely for them to feed and maintain and therefore the King ordered them to be maintained by his Subjects neither was any work required of them but they had liberty to beg By this means they got food and rayment from the Inhabitauts who were zealously charitable to them But to proceed we kept a little without all the Islands and coasting 5 or 6 leagues further we stood right over towards the N. E. Cod of the Bay of Tonquin The Bay of Tonquin has its entrance between the S. E. point of Champa on the West side which lies in the lat of about 12 d. North and the Island of Aynam near the S. W. part of China on the East side The Island of Aynam is in about 19 d. North. It is a pretty considerable Island well peopled with Chinese Inhabitants They have Ships of their own and drive a great trade by Sea I have seen many of their Ships some of 100 Tun with Outlagers on both sides and others like ordinary Jonks without Outlagers but am wholly ignorant of their Trade any farther than what I have mentioned of their having Pearl Oysters there in the 7th Chapter of my Voyage round the World page 174. Near the Cod of the Bay of Tonquin there are abundance of small Islands of which I shall speak more hereafter The mouth of the Bay seems to be barr'd up with the great shole of Pracel which lies stretched at length before it yet leaving two wide Channels one at each end so that Ships may pass in or out either way And therefore even the Ships that are bound from the Streights of Malacca or Siam to China may as well pass to and fro within the shole at without The Bay of Tonquin is about 30 leagues wide in the broadest place There is good sounding and anchoring all over it and in the middle where it is deepest there is about 46 fathom water There you have black Oaz and dark Peppery Sand but on the West side there is reddish Oazy Sand. Beside the other Islands before-mentioned there are others of less note on the Cochinchina Coast but none of them all above 4 or 5 miles from the shore In the bottom of the Bay also there are some small Islands close by the Tonquin shore 2 of these are of especial note not for their bigness but for Sea-marks for the 2 principal Rivers or mouth rather of the chief River of Tonquin One of these Rivers or Mouths is call'd Rokko It discharges it self into the Sea near the N. W. corner of the Bay and the mouth of it is in about 20 d. 6m N. This River or branch I was not at but have been informed that it has not above 12 foot water at the entrance but that its bottom is soft Oaz and therefore very convenient for small Vessels and it is the way that all the Chinese and Siamers do use About a League to the Westward of this Rivers mouth there is a small pretty high Island called Fishers Island It lyeth about 2 mile from the shore and it hath good anchoring about it in 17 or 18 foot water and therefore it is not only a Sea-mark for the River but a secure place to ride in
they would have all the produce of them at their own disposal Yet even in this they are short and may be still more disappointed of the Pepper Trade if other People would seek for it For the greatest part of the Island of Sumatra propagates this Plant and the Natives would readily comply with any who would come to Trade with them notwithstanding the great endeavours the Dutch make against it for this Island is so large populous and productive of Pepper that the Dutch are not able to draw all to themselves Indeed this place about Bancalis is in a manner at their devotion and for ought I know it was through a design of being revenged on the Dutch that Captain Johnson lost his life I find the Malayans in general are implacable Enemies to the Dutch and all seems to spring from an earnest desire they have a free Trade which is restrained by them not only here but in the Spice Islands and in all other places where they have any power But 't is freedom only must be the means to incourage any of these remote people to Trade especially such of them as are industrious and whose inclinations are bent this way as most of the Malayans are and the Major part of the people of the East Indies even from the Cape of Good Hope Eastward to Japan both Continent and Islands For tho in many places they are limited by the Dutch English Danes c. and restrain'd from a free Trade with other Nations yet have they continually shewn what an uneasiness that is to them And how dear has this Restraint cost the Dutch when yet neither can they with all the Forts and Guard-Ships secure the Trade wholly to themselves any more then the Barlaventa Fleet can secure the Trade of the West Indies to the Spaniards but enough of this matter You have heard before that Mr. Wells came with his Sloop to Bancalis to the great joy of the 2 men that were yet alive in Captain Johnson's Vessel These 2 Seamen were so just that they put all Captain Johnsons Papers and Money into one Chest then lockt it and put the Key of it into another Chest and locking that flung the Key of it into the Sea and when Mr Wells came aboard they offered him the Command of both Vessels He seemingly refused it saying that he was no Seaman and could not manage either of them yet by much importunity he accepted the Command of them or at least undertook the account of what was in the Sloop engaging to give a faithful account of it to Governor Bloom They were all now so weakned that they were but just enough to sail one of the Vessels Therefore they sent to the Shabander of Bancalis to desire some of his Men to help sail the Sloops over to Malacca but he refused it Then they offered to sell one of them for a small matter but neither would he buy Then they offered to give him the smallest to that he answered that he did not dare to accept of her for fear of the Dutch Then Mr. Wells and his crew concluded to take the Pepper and all the Stores out of the small Vessel and burn her and go away with the other to Malacca This they put in execution and presently went away and opening Captain Johnson's Chest they found 2 or 300 Dollars in Money This with all his Writings and what else they found of value Mr. Wells took into his possession In a very short time they got over to Malacca There they stayed expecting the coming of some English Ship to get a Pilot to Navigate the Sloop for neither of them would undertake to Navigate her farther Captain Lacy coming hither first he spared Mr. Wells his chief Mate to Navigate her to Achin when we came hither they were ready to sail and went away 2 or 3 days before us To return therefore to our own Voyage Captain Weldon having finished his business at Malacca we failed again steering towards Achin where he designed to touch in his way to Fort St. George We overtook Mr Wells about 35 leagues short of Achin against the River Passange Jonca and shortly after we both arrived at Achin and anchored in the Road about the beginning of March 1689. Here I took my leave of Captain Weldon and of my friend Mr. Hall who went with us to Tonquin and I went ashore being very weak with my Flux as I had been all the Voyage Captain Weldon offered me any kindness that lay in his Power at Fort St. George if I would go with him thither but I chose rather to stay here having some small acquaintance than to go in that weak condition to a place where I was wholly unknown But Mr. Hall went with Captain Weldon to Fort St. George and from thence in a short time returned to England in the Williamson of London CHAP VII The Country of Achin described its Situation and Extent Golden Mount and the Neighbouring Isles of Way and Gomez c. making several Channels and the Road of Achin The Soil of the Continent Trees and Fruits particularly the Mangastan and Pumple-nose Their Roots Herbs and Drugs the Herb Ganga or Bang and Camphire the Pepper of Sumatra and Gold of Achin The Beasts Fowl and Fish The People their Temper Habits Buildings City of Achin and Trades The Husbandry Fishery Carpenters and Flying Proes The Money-Changers Coin and Weights Of the Gold-Mines The Merchants who come to Achin and of the Chinese Camp or Fair. The washing used at Achin A Chinese Renegado Punishments for Theft and other Crimes The Government of Achin of the Queen Oronkeys or Nobles and of the Slavery of the People The State kept by the Eastern Princes A Civil War here upon the choice of a new Queen The A. and the other English in a fright upon a seizure made of a Moors Ship by an English Captain The weather floods and heat at Achin BEing now arrived at Achin again I think it not amiss to give the Reader some short account of what observations I made of that City and Country This Kingdom is the largest and best peopled of many small ones that are up and down the Isle of Sumatra and it makes the North West end of that Island It reaches Eastward from that N. W. point of the Island a great way along the shore towards the Streights of Malacca for about 50 or 60 Leagues But from Diamond point which is about 40 Leagues from Achin towards the borders of the Kingdom the Inhabitants tho belonging to Achin are less in subjection to it Of these I can say but little neither do I know the bounds of this Kingdom either within Land or along the West Coast. That West side of the Kingdom is high and mountainous as is generally the rest of the West Coast of the whole Island The point also of Achin or extremity of the Island is High Land but Achin it self and the Country to the Eastward is lower
anchored on the North side of one of the sandy Islands the most convenient Place for his design Having got ashore his Cask to put his Oyl in and set up a Tent for lodging himself and his Goods he began to kill the Seal and had not wrought above three or four Days before a fierce North-wind blew his Bark ashore By good fortune she was not damnified but his company being but small and so despairing of setting her afloat again they fell to contriving how to get away a very difficult Task to accomplish for it was 24 or 25 Leagues to the nearest Place of the Main and above 100 Leagues to Trist which was the next English settlement But contrary to their expectation instead of that Captain Long bid them follow their Work of Seal-killing and making Oyl assuring them that he would undertake at his own peril to carry them safe to Trist. This though it went much against the grain yet at last he so far prevailed by fair Words that they were contented to go on with their Seal-killing till they had filled all their Cask But their greatest work was yet to do viz. how they should get over to the Main and then Coast down before the Wind to Trist. Their Boat was not big enough to transport them so they concluded to cut down the Barks Masts and rip up her Deck to make a float for that purpose This being agreed on the next Morning betimes pursuant to their Resolution they were going to break up their Vessel but it happened that very Night that two New-England Ketches going down to Trist ran on the backside of the Riff where they struck on the Rocks and were bulged And Captain Long and his Crew seeing them in Distress presently took their Boat and went off to help them unlade their Goods and bring them ashore and in requital they furnished the Captain with such tackle and other Necessaries as he wanted and assisted him in the launching his Vessel and lading his Oyl and so they went merrily away for Trist This lucky accident was much talk'd of amongst the C's Crew and so exasperated the New-England Men when they heard the whole story that they were thinking if their Commanders would have suffered them to have thrown him into the Sea to prevent his doing more mischief For they were sure that he by his Art had caused them to run aground The whole of this Relation I had from Captain Long himself From the main to these Islands the Sea deepens gradually till you come to about 30 Fathom Water and when you are 25 or 26 Leagues off shore to the Eastward of them if you steer away West keeping in that depth you cannot miss them The same Rule is to be observed to find any other Island as the Triangles the Isles Des Arenas c. for the Bank runs all along the shore on which are Soundings of equal depth and the Sea appears of a muddy palish Colour but when past the Bank on the North side of it it resumes its natural greeness and is too deep for any Sounding till you are within 30 Leagues of the North side of the Bay of Mexico where by relation there is such another Bank abounding with Oysters running all along the shore But to return to our Voyage Having spent 2 or 3 days among the Alcranes Islands we set sail again and steering in Southerly for the Main having the Wind at E. N. E. we fell in with it a little to Leeward of Cape Catoch plying under the shore till we reach'd the Cape from thence we continued our Course Northerly the Wind at E. by S. The next Land we designed for was Cape Antonio which is the Westermost Point of the Island Cuba and distant from Cape Catoch about 40 Leagues Some when they sail out of the Bay keep along by the Land of Jucatan till they come as far as the Island Cozumel and from thence stretch over towards Cuba and if the Wind favours them any thing they will get as high as Cape Corientes before they fall in with Cuba for in their Passage from thence they are not in so much danger of being hurried away to the North by the Current between the two Capes or to the North of them as we were For taking our Course Northward till the Lat. of 22 d. 30 m. we tack'd again and the Wind at E. steered away S. S. E. 24 hours and having taken an Observation of the Sun as we did the day before found our selves in 23 d. being driven backwards in 24 hours 30 Miles We had then the Channel open between the two Capes but to the North of either Yet at last we got over to the Cuba shore and fell in with the North of the Island about 7 or 8 Leagues from Cape Antonio Now we both saw and ran thro' some of the Colorado Sholes but found a very good Channel among a great many Rocks that appeared above Water Being thus got within the Sholes between them and Cuba we found a pretty wide clear Channel and good Anchoring and advancing further within a League of the Cape we Anchored and went ashore to get Water but found none In the Evening when the Land-wind sprung up we weighed again and doubling the Cape coasted along on the South side of the Island taking the Advantages both of Sea and Land-winds For though we had now been about two Months from Trist and this the time of the Year for Norths yet to our great trouble they had hitherto failed us and besides as I said before our Ketch was such a Leewardly Vessel that we did not yet expect we could possibly reach Jamaica meerly by turning though sometimes assisted by Sea and Land-Winds In about a Week after this we got up with and coasted along the Isle of Pines for 7 or 8 Leagues and then stood off to Sea and the third Morning fell in with the West end of grand Caymanes This Island is about 40 Leagues South from Pines and about 15 to the West of little Caymanes we anchored at the West end about half a Mile from the shore We found no Water nor any Provision but saw many Crocodiles on the Bay some of which would scarce stir out of the way for us We kill'd none of them which we might easily have done though Food began to be short withus indeed had it been in the Months of June or July we might probably have gotten Turtle for they frequent this Island some Years as much as they do little Caymanes We stayed here but 3 or 4 hours and steered back for Pines intending there to hunt for Beef or Hog of both which there is in great plenty The second day in the Morning we fell in with the West end of Pines and running about 4 or 5 Miles Northward we anchored in 4 Fathom Water clean Sand about two Mile from the shore and right-against a small Creek through the Mangroves into a wide Lagune The Isle of
observed his Method in curing the Horse which was this First he strok'd the sore Place then applying to it a little rough Powder which looked like Tobacco Leaves dryed and crumbled small mumbling some Words to himself he blew upon the part three times and waving his Hands as often over it said it would be well speedily His Fee for the Cure was a White Cock Then coming to me and looking on the Worm in my Ancle he promised to cure it in three Days demanding also a White Cock for his pains and using exactly the same Method with me as he did with the Horse He bad me not open it in three Days but I did not stay so long for the next Morning the Cloath being rubb'd off I unbound it and found the Worm broken off and the Hole quite healed up I was afraid the remaining part would have given some trouble but have not felt any pain there from that day to this To return I told you how I was interrupted in following my Work by the Worms breeding in my Leg. And to compleat my misfortune presently after we had the most violent Storm for above 24 Hours that ever was known in these Parts An Account of which I shall give more particularly in my Discourse of Winds and shall now only mention some Passages I have already said we were four of us in Company at this Place cutting Logwood and by this Storm were reduced to great Inconveniencies for while that lasted we could dress no Victuals nor even now it was over unless we had done it in the Canoa for the highest Land near us was almost 3 Foot under Water besides our Provision too was most of it spoiled except the Beef and Pork which was but little the worse We had a good Canoa large enough to carry us all and seeing it in vain to stay here any longer we all embarked and rowed away to One-Bush-Key about 4 Leagues from our Huts There were 4 Ships riding here when the Storm began but at our arrival we found only one and hoped to have got some Refreshment from it but found very cold entertainment For we could neither get Bread nor Punch nor so much as a Dram of Rum though we offered them Money for it The Reason was they were already over-charged with such as being distressed by the Storm had been forced to take Sanctuary with them seeing we could not be supplied here we asked which way the other three Ships were driven they told us that Capt. Prout of New-England was driven towards Trist and 't was probable he was carried out to Sea unless he stuck on a Sand called the Middle Ground that Capt. Skinner of New-England was driven towards Beef-Island and Captain Chandler of London drove away towards Man-of-War Lagune Beef-Island lies North from One-Bush-Key but the other two Places lie a little on each side One to the East the other to the West So away we went for Beef-Island and coming within a League of it we saw a Flag in the Woods made fast to a Pole and placed on the Top of a high Tree And coming still nearer we at last saw a Ship in the Woods about 200 Yards from the Sea We rowed directly towards her and when we came to the Woods side found a pretty clear Passage made by the Ship through the Woods the Trees being all broke down And about three Foot Water Home to the Ship We rowed in with our Canoa and went Aboard and were kindly Entertained by the Seamen but the Captain was gone Aboard Captain Prout who stuck fast on the middle Ground before-mentioned Captain Prout's Ship was afterwards got off again but the Stumps of the Trees ran clear through the bottom of Captain Skinner's therefore there was no hope of saving her Here we got Victuals and Punch and stayed about two Hours in which time the Captain came Aboard and invited us to stay all Night But hearing some Guns fired in Man-of-War Lagune we concluded that Captain Chandler was there and wanted assistance Therefore we presently rowed away thither for we could do no Service here and before Night found him also stuck fast on a Point of Sand. The Head of his Ketch was dry and at the Stern there was above 4 Foot Water Our coming was very seasonable to Captain Chandler with whom we stayed two Days in which time we got out all his Goods carried off his Anchor c. and so not being able as yet to do him more Service we left him for the present and went away to hunt at Beef-Island At Trist were four Vessels riding before this Storm one of them was driven off to Sea and never heard of afterwards Another was cast dry upon the shore where she lay and was never got off again But the third rode it out Another was riding without the Bar of Trist and she put to Sea and got to New-England but much shattered About three days before this Storm began a small Vessel Commanded by Captain Vally went hence bound to Jamaica This Vessel was given for lost by all the Logwood-Cutters but about 4 Months after she returned thither again and the Captain said he felt nothing of the Storm but when he was about 30 Leagues to Wind-ward of Trist he had a fresh Summasenta-Wind that carried him as high as Cape Condecedo but all the time he saw very black Clouds to the Westward Beef-Island is about 7 Leagues long and 3 or 4 broad It lies in length East and West The East end looks toward the Island Trist and is low drowned Land and near the Sea produceth nothing but white and black Mangrove-Trees The North side lies open to the Main Sea running straight from East to West The Eastermost part for about three Leagues from Trist is Low and Mangrovy at the end of which there is a small salt Creek deep enough at high Water for Boats to pass From this Creek to the West end is 4 Leagues all sandy Bay closed on the backside with a low Sand-bank abounding with thick prickly Bushes like a White-thorn bearing a whitish hard Shell-Fruit as big as a Sloe much like a Calla-bash The West end is washed with the River St. Peter St. Paul This end is over-grown with red Mangroves About 3 Leagues up from the Mouth of this River shoots forth a small Branch running to the Eastward and dividing beef-Beef-Island form the Main on the South and afterwards makes a great Lake of fresh Water called Fresh Water Lagune This afterward falls into a Salt Lake called Man-of-War Lagune which emptys it self into Laguna Termina about 2 Leagues from the S. E. Point of the Island The inside or middle of this Island is a Savannah bordered all round with Trees most Mangrovy either black white or red with some Logwood The South side between the Savannahs and the Mangroves is very rich Sometimes this Land lyes in Ridges higher than the Savannahs The Savannahs produce plenty of long Grass and the Ridges
down in Lat. 12 d. 16 m. It is about 20 leagues from the Main and 9 or 10 from Querisao and is accounted 16 or 17 leagues round The Road is on the S. W. side near the middle of the Island where there is a pretty deep Bay runs in Ships that come from the Eastward luff up close to the Eastern shore and let go their Anchor in 60 fathom water within half a Cables length of the shore But at the same time they must be ready with a Boat to carry a Hasar or Rope and make it fast ashore otherwise when the Land-wind comes in the night the Ship would drive off to Sea again for the ground is so steep that no Anchor can hold if once it starts About half a mile to the Westward of this Anchoring place there is a small low Island and a Channel between it and the main Island The Houses are about half a mile within Land right in the Road There is a Governour lives here a Deputy to the Governor of Querisao and 7 or 8 Soldiers with 5 or 6 Families of Indians There is no Fort and the Soldiers in peaceable times have little to do but to eat and sleep for they never watch but in time of War The Indians are Husband-men and plant Maiz and Guinea Corn and some Yames and Potatoes But their chiefest business is about Cattle for this Island is plentifully stocked with Goats and they send great quantities every year in Salt to Querisao There are some Horses and Bulls and Cows but I never saw any Sheep though I have been all over the Island The South side is plain low Land and there are several sorts of Trees but none very large There is a small Spring of water by the Houses which serves the Inhabitants though it is brackish At the West end of the Island there is a good Spring of Fresh water and 3 or 4 Indian Families live there but no Water nor Houses at any other place On the South side near the East-end is a good Salt-pond where Dutch Sloops come for Salt From Bon-Airy we went to the Isle of Aves or Birds so called from its great plenty of Birds as Men of War and Boobies but especially Boobies The Booby is a Water-fowl somewhat less than a Hen of a light greyish colour I observ'd the Boobies of this Island to be whiter than others This Bird hath a strong Bill longer and bigger than a Crows and broader at the end her Feet are flat like a Ducks Feet It is a very simple creature and will hardly go out of a mans way In other places they build their Nests on the ground but here they build on Trees which I never saw any where else tho I have seen of them in a great many places Their Flesh is black and eats Fishy but are often eaten by the Privateers Their numbers have been much lessen'd by the French Fleet which lay here till it was lost as I shall give an account The Man of War as it is called by the English is about the bigness of a Kite and in shape like it but black and the Neck is red It lives on Fish yet never lights on the Water but soars aloft like a Kite and when it sees its prey it flys down head foremost to the waters edge very swiftly takes his prey out of the Sea with his Bill and immediately mounts again as swiftly and never touching the Water but with his Bill His Wings are very long His Feet are like other Land-Fowl and he builds on Trees where he finds any but where they are wanting on the ground This Island Aves lies about 8 or 9 leagues to the Eastward of the Island Bon-airy about 14 or 15 leagues from the Main and about the lat of 11d 45m North. It is but small not above 4 mile in length and towards the East end not half a mile broad On the North side it is low Land commonly overflown with the Tide but on the Southside there is a great Rocky Bank of Coral thrown up by the Sea The West end is for near a mile space plain even Savanah Land without any Trees There are 2 or 3 Wells dug by Privateers who often frequent this Island because there is a good Harbor about the middle of it on the North side where they may conveniently careen The Riff or Bank of Rocks on which the French Fleet was lost as I mentioned above runs along from the East end to the Northward about 3 mile then tends away to the Westward making as it were a Half Moon This Riff breaks off all the Sea and there is good riding in even sandy ground to the Westward of it There are 2 or 3 small low sandy Keys or Islands within this Riff about 3 miles from the Main Island The Count de Estree lost his Fleet here in this manner Coming from the Eastward he fell in on the back of the Riff and fired Guns to give warning to the rest of his Fleet But they supposing their Admiral was engaged with Enemies hoised up their Topsails and crowded all the Sail they could make and ran full sail ashore after him all within half a mile of each other For his Light being in the Main Top was an unhappy Beacon for them to follow and there escaped but one Kings-ship and one Privateer The Ships continued whole all day and the Men had time enough most of them to get ashore yet many perished in the Wreck and many of those that got safe on the Island for want of being accustomed to such hardships died like rotten Sheep But the Privateers who had been used to such accidents lived merrily from whom I had this relation and they told me that if they had gone to Jamaica with 30 l. a Man in their Pockets they could not have enjoyed themselves more For they kept in a Gang by themselves and watched when the Ships broke to get the Goods that came from them and though much was staved against the Rocks yet abundance of Wine and Brandy floated over the Riff where these Privateers waited to take it up They lived here about 3 weeks waiting an opportunity to transport themselves back again to Hispaniola in all which time they were never without 2 or 3 Hogsheads of Wine and Brandy in their Tents and Barrels of Beef and Pork which they could live on without Bread well enough tho the new-comers out of France could not There were about 40 Frenchmen on board in one of the Ships where there was good store of Liquor till the after part of her broke away and floated over the Riff and was carry'd away to Sea with all the men drinking and singing who being in drink did not mind the danger but were never heard of afterwards In a short time after this great Shipwrack Captain Pain Commander of a Privateer of 6 Guns had a pleasant accident befel him at this Island He came hither to Careen intending to fit
times sought after by the Spaniards who knew he was left on the Island yet they could never find him He was in the Woods hunting for Goats when Captain Watlin drew off his men and the Ship was under sail before he came back to shore He had with him his Gun and a Knife with a small Horn of Powder and a few Shot which being spent he contrived a way by notching his Knife to saw the barrel of his Gun into small pieces wherewith he made Harpoons Lances Hooks and a long Knife heating the pieces first in the fire which he struck with his Gunflint and a piece of the barrel of his Gun which he hardened having learnt to do that among the English The hot pieces of Iron he would hammer out and bend as he pleased with Stones and saw them with his jagged Knife or grind them to an edge by long labour and harden them to a good temper as there was occasion All this may seem strange to those that are not acquainted with the sagacity of the Indians but it is no more than these Moskito men are accustomed to in their own Country where they make their own Fishing and Striking Instruments without either Forge or Anvil tho they spend a great deal of time about them Other Wild Indians who have not the use of Iron which the Moskito men have from the English make Hatchets of a very hard stone with which they will cut down Trees the Cotton Tree especially which is a soft tender Wood to build their Houses or make Canoas and though in working their Canoas hollow they cannot dig them so neat and thin yet they will make them fit for their service This their digging or hatchet-work they help out by fire whether for the felling of the Trees or for the making the inside of their Canoa hollow These contrivances are used particularly by the Savage Indians of Blewfield s River described in the 3d Chapter whose Canoas and Stone-hatchets I have seen These Stone-hatchets are about 10 inches long 4 broad and 3 inches thick in the middle They are grownd away flat and sharp at both ends right in the midst and clear round it they make a notch so wide and deep that a man might place his Finger along it and taking a stick or withe about 4 foot long they bind it round the Hatchet-head in that notch and so twisting it hard use it as an handle or helve the head being held by it very fast Nor are other Wild Indians less ingenious Those of Patagonia particularly head their Arrows with Flint cut or grownd which I have seen and admired But to return to our Moskito man on the Isle of John Fernando With such Instruments as he made in that manner he got such Provision as the Island afforded either Goats or Fish He told us that at first he was forced to eat Seal which is very ordinary meat before he had made Hooks but afterwards he never kill'd any Seals but to make lines cutting their skins into thongs He had a little House or Hut half a mile from the Sea which was lined with Goats skin his Couch or Barbecu of sticks lying along about 2 foot distant from the ground was spread with the same and was all his Bedding He had no Cloaths left having worn out those he brought from Watlin's Ship but only a Skin about his Waste He saw our Ship the day before we came to an Anchor and did believe we were English and therefore kill'd 3 Goats in the morning before we came to an anchor and drest them with Cabbage to treat us when we came ashore He came then to the Sea side to congratulate our safe arrival And when we landed a Moskito Indian named Robin first leapt ashore and running to his brother Moskito man threw himself flat on his face at his feet who helping him up and embracing him fell flat with his face on the ground at Robins feet and was by him taken up also We stood with pleasure to behold the surprize and tenderness and solemnity of this interview which was exceedingly affectionate on both sides and when their ceremonies of civility were over we also that stood gazing at them drew near each of us embracing him we had found here who was overjoyed to see so many of his old friends come hither as he thought purposely to fetch him He was named Will as the other was Robin These were names given them by the English for they have no names among themselves and they take it as a great favour to be named by any of us and will complain for want of it if we do not appoint them some name when they are with us saying of themselves they are poor Men and have no name This Island is in lat 34 d. 15 m. and about 120 leagues from the Main It is about 12 leagues round full of high Hills and small pleasant Valleys which if manured would probably produce any thing proper for the Climate The sides of the Mountains are part Savanahs part Wood-land Savanahs are clear pieces of Land without Woods not because more barren than the Wood-land for they are frequently spots of as good Land as any and often are intermixt with Wood-land In the Bay of Campeachy are very large Savanahs which I have seen full of Cattle but about the River of Plate are the largest that ever I heard of 50 60 or 100 miles in length and Jamaica Cuba and Hispaniola have many Savanahs intermixt with Woods Places cleared of Wood by Art and Labour do not go by this name but those only which are found so in the uninhabited parts of America such as this Isle of John Fernandoes or which were originally clear in other parts The Grass in these Savanahs at John Fernando's is not a long flaggy Grass such as is usually in the Savanahs in the West-Indies but a sort of kindly Grass both thick and flourishing the biggest part of the year The Woods afford divers sorts of Trees some large and good Timber for Building but none fit for Masts The Cabbage Trees of this Isle are but small and low yet afford a good head and the Cabbage very sweet This Tree I shall describe in the Appendix in the Bay of Campeachy The Savanahs are stocked with Goats in great Herds but those that live on the East end of the Island are not so fat as those on the West end for though there is much more Grass and plenty of Water in every Valley nevertheless they thrive not so well here as on the West end where there is less food and yet there are found greater Flocks and those too fatter and sweeter That West end of the Island is all high Champion ground without any Vally and but one place to land there is neither Wood nor any fresh Water and the Grass short and dry Goats were first put on the Island by John Fernando who first discovered it in his Voyage from Lima to Baldivia
Eaton in the Streights of Magellan the Spaniards of Baldivia were doubtless informed of us by him suspecting him also to be one of us tho he was not Upon this News the Viceroy of Lima sent Expresses to all the Sea Ports that they might provide themselves against our Assaults We immediately steered away for the Island Lobos which lieth in lat 6 deg 24 min. South lat I took the Elevation of it ashore with an Astrolabe and its 5 leagues from the Main it is called Lobos de la Mar to distinguish it from another that is not far from it and extremely like it called Lobos de la Terra for it lies nearer the Main Lobos or Lovos is the Spanish Name for a Seal of which there are great plenty about these and several other Islands in these Seas that go by this Name The 9th of May we arrived at this Isle of Lobos de la Mar and came to an anchor with our Prize This Lobos consists indeed of two little Islands each about a milâ—…und of an indifferent heighth a small Channel between fit for Boats only and several Rocks lying on the North side of the Islands a little way from shore There is a small Cove or Sandy Bay sheltred from the Winds at the West end of the Eastermost Island where Ships may Careen The rest of the shore as well round the 2 Islands as between them is a Rocky Coast consisting of small Cliffs Within Land they are both of them partly Rocky and partly Sandy Barren without any fresh Water Tree Shrub Grass or Herbs or any Land Animals for the Seals and Sea-Lyons come ashore here but Fowls Of which there are great multitudes as Boobies but mostly Penguins which I have seen plentifully all over the South Seas on the Coast of Newfoundland and of the Cape of Good Hope They are a Sea Fowl about as big as a Duck and such Feet but a sharp Bill feeding on Fish They do not fly but flutter having rather stumps like a young Gossins than Wings And these are instead of Fins to them in the Water Their Feathers are Downy Their flesh is but ordinary food but their Eggs are good Meat There is another sort of small black Fowl that make holes in the Sand for their Night habitations whose flesh is good sweet meat I never saw any of them but here and at John Fernandos There is good riding between the Eastermost Island and the Rocks in 10 12 or 14 fathom for the wind is commonly at S. or S. S. E. and the Eastermost Island lying East and West shelters that Road. Here we scrubb'd our Ships and being in a readiness to sail the Prisoners were Examined to know if any of them could conduct us to some Town where we might make some attempt For they had before informed us that we were discried by the Spaniards and by that we knew that they would send no Riches by Sea so long as we were here Many Towns were considered on as Guiaquil Zana Truxillo and others At last Truxillo was pitched on as the most important therefore the likeliest to make us a Voyage if we could Conquer it which we did not much question though we knew it to be a very populous City But the greatest difficulty was in Landing for Guanchaquo which is the nearest Sea-port to it but 6 miles off is an ill place to Land since sometimes the very Fishermen that live there are not able to go out in 3 or 4 days However the 17th of May in the Afternoon our Men were mustered of both Ships Companies and their Arms proved We were in all 108 Men fit for Service besides the sick and the next day we intended to Sail and take the Wood Prize with us But the next day one of our Men being ashoar betimes on the Island discried three Sail bound to the North-ward two of them without the Island to the Westward the other between it and the Continent We soon got our Anchors up and chased and Captain Eaton who drew the least draught of Water put through between the Westermost Island and the Rocks and went after those two that were without the Islands We in Captain Cook 's Ship went after the other which stood in for the Main-Land but we soon fetched her up and having taken her stood in again with her to the Island for we saw that Captain Eaton wanted no help having taken both those that he went after He came in with one of his Prizes but the other was so far to Leeward and so deep that he could not then get her in but he hoped to get her in the next day but being deep laden as designed to go down before the wind to Panama she would not bear Sail. The 19th day she turned all day but got nothing nearer the Island Our Moskito strikers according to their custom went out and struck 6 Turtles for here are indifferent plenty of them These Ships that we took the day before came from Guanchaquo all three laden with Flower bound for Panama Two of them were laden as deep as they could swim the other was not above half laden but was ordered by the Vice-Roy of Lima to sail with the other two or else she should not sail till we were gone out of the Seas for he hoped they might escape us by setting out early In the biggest Ship was a Letter to the President of Panama from the Vice-Roy of Lima assuring him that there were Enemies come into that Sea for which reason he had dispatched these three Ships with Flower that they might not want for Panama is supplied from Peru and desired him to be frugal of it for he knew not when he should send more In this Ship were likewise 7 or 8 Tuns of Marmalate of Quinees and a stately Mule sent to the President and a very large Image of the Virgin Mary in Wood Carved and Painted to adorn a new Church at Panama and sent from Lima by the Vice-Roy for this great Ship came from thence not long before She brought also from Lima 800000 pieces of Eight to carry with her to Panama but while she lay at Guanchaco taking in her lading of Flower the Merchants hearing of Capt. Swan's being at Baldivia ordered the Money ashore again These Prisoners likewise informed us that the Gentlemen Inhabitants of Truxillo were building a Fort at Guanchaco which is the Sea Port for Truxillo close by the Sea purposely to hinder the designs of any that should attempt to land there Upon this news we altered our former resolutions and resolved to go with our three Prizes to the Gallapagos which are a great many large Islands lying some under the Equator others on each side of it I shall here omit the description of Truxillo because in my Appontlix at the latter end of the Book I intend to give a general Relation of most of the Towns of note on this Coast from Baldivia to Panama and from thence towards
was so named by the Spaniards after Sir Francis Drake took the Caoafoga a Ship chiefly laden with Plate which they say he brought hither and divided it here with his Men. It is about 4 mile long and a mile and half broad and of a good heighth It is bounded with high steep Cliffs clear round only at one place on the East side The top of it is flat and even the Soil sandy and dry the Trees it produceth are but small bodied low and grow thin and there are only 3 or 4 sorts of Trees all unknown to us I observed they were much overgrown with long Moss There is good Grass especially in the beginning of the year There is no Water on this Island but at one place on the East side close by the Sea there it drills slowly down from the Rocks where it may be received into Vessels There was plenty of Goats but they are now all destroyed There is no other sort of Land Animal that I did ever see here are plenty of Boobies and Men of War Birds The anchoring place is on the East side near the middle of the Island close by the shore within two Cables lengths of the sandy Bay there is about 18 or 20 fathom good fast oazy ground and smooth Water for the S. E. point of the Island shelters from the South Winds which constantly blow here From the S. E. point there strikes out a small shole a quarter of a mile into the Sea where there is commonly a great Riplin or working of short Waves during all the Flood The Tide runs pretty strong the Flood to the South and the Ebb to the North. There is good landing on the Sandy Bay against the anchoring place from whence you may go up into the Island and at no place besides There are 2 or 3 high steep small Rocks at the S. E. point not a Cables length from the Island and another much bigger at the N. E. end it is deep Water all round but at the anchoring place and at the shole at the S. E point This Island lieth in lat 01d 10 m. South It is distant from Cape St. Lorenzo 4 or 5 leagues bearing from it W. S. W. and half a point westerly At this Island are plenty of those small Sea Turtle spoken of in my last Chapter The 21st day Captain Eaton came to an anchor by us he was very willing to have consorted with us again but Captain Davis's Men were so unreasonable that they would not allow Captain Eaton's Men an equal share with them in what they got therefore Captain Eaton staid here but one night and the next day sailed from hence steering away to the Southward We staid no longer than the day ensuing and then we sailed toward Point St. Hellena intending there to land some Men purposely to get Prisoners for intelligence Point Santa Hellena bears South from the Island Plata It lies in lat 2d 15 m. South The Point is pretty high flat and even at top overgrown with many great Thistles but no sort of Tree at a distance it appears like an Island because the Land within it is very low This Point strikes out West into the Sea making a pretty large Bay on the North side A mile within the Point on the Sandy Bay close by the Sea there is a poor small Indian Village called Sancta Hellena the Land about it is low sandy and barren there are no Trees nor Grass growing near it neither do the Indians produce any Fruit Grain or Plant but Water-Melons only which are large and very sweet There is no fresh Water at this place nor near it therefore the Inhabitants are obliged to fetch all their Water from the River Colanche which is in the bottom of the Bay about 4 leagues from it Not far from this Town on the Bay close by the Sea about 5 paces from high-water mark there is a sort of bitumenous matter boils out of a little hole in the earth It is like thin Tar the Spaniards call it Algatrane By much boiling it becomes hard like Pitch It is frequently used by the Spaniards instead of Pitch and the Indians that inhabit here save it in Jars It boils up most at high water and. then the Indians are ready to receive it These Indians are Fishermen and go out to Sea on Bark-logs Their chief subsistence is Maiz most of which they get from Ships that come hither for Algatrane There is good anchoring to leeward of the Point right against the Village but on the West side of the Point it is deep Water and no anchoring The Spaniards do report that there was once a very rich Ship driven ashore here in calm for want of Wind to work her Assoon as ever she struck she heel'd off to Sea and fill'd with Water presently and then slid off to 7 or 8 fathom Water where she lies to this day none having attempted to fish for her because she lies deep and there falls in here a great high Sea When we were abreast of this Point we sent away our Canoas in the night to take the Indian Village They landed in the morning betimes close by the Town and took some Prisoners They took likewise a small Bark which the Indians had set on fire but our Men quenched it and took the Indian that did it who being asked wherefore he set the Bark on fire said That there was an Order from the Vice-Roy lately set out commanding all Sea-men to burn their Vessels if attacked by us and betake themselves to their Boats There was another Bark in a small Cove a mile from the Village thither our men went thinking to take her but the Sea-men that were aboard set her in flames and fled In the evening our men came aboard and brought the small Bark with them the fire of which they had quenched and then we returned again towards Plata where we arriv'd the 26th day of September In the evening we sent out some men in our Bark lately taken and Canoas to an Indian Village called Manta 2 or 3 leagues to the Westward of Cape St. Lorenzo hoping there to get other Prisoners for we could not learn from those we took at Point St. Hellena the reason why the Vice-Roy should give such orders to burn the Ships They had a fresh Sea-breeze till 12 a clock at night and then it proved Calm wherefore they rowed away with their Canoas as near to the Town as they thought convenient and lay still till day Manta is a small Indian Village on the Main distant from the Island Plata 7 or 8 leagues It slands so advantageously to be seen being built on a small ascent that it makes a very fair prospect to the Sea yet but a few poor scattering Indian houses There is a very fine Church adorned with a great deal of Carved work It was formerly a habitation of Spaniards but they are all removed from hence now The Land about it is dry and
never see one Pearl Oyster about them nor any Pearl Oyster Shells but on the other Oysters I have made many a Meal there The northermost Island of all this range is called Pacheca or Pacheque This is but a small Island distant from Panama 11 or 12 leagues The Southermost of them is called St. Pauls Besides these two I know no more that are called by any particular name though there are many that far exceed either of the two in bigness Some of these Islands are planted with Plantains and Bonanas and there are Fields of Rice on others of them The Gentlemen of Panama to whom they belong keep Negroes there to plant weed and husband the Plantations Many of them especially the largest are wholly untill'd yet very good fat Land full of large Trees These unplanted Islands shelter many Runaway Negroes who abscond in the Woods all day and in the night boldly pillage the Plantain Walks Betwixt these Islands and the Main is a Channel of 7 or 8 leagues wide there is good depth of Water and good anchoring all the way The Islands border thick on each other yet they make many small narrow deep Channels fit only for Boats to pass between most of them At the S. E. end about a league from St. Pauls Island there is a good place for Ships to careen or hale ashore It is surrounded with the Land and hath a good deep Channel on the North side to go in at The tide riseth here about 10 foot perpendicular We brought our Ships into this place the 25th day but were forced to tarry for a Spring Tide before we could have Water enough to clean them therefore we first cleaned our Barks that they might cruise before Panama while we lay here The 27th day our Barks being clean we sent them out with 20 Men in each The fourth day after they returned with a Prize laden with Maiz or Indian Corn Salt Beef and Fowls She came from Lavelia and was bound to Panama Lavelia is a Town we once designed to attempt It is pretty large and stands on the Banks of a River on the North side of the Bay of Panama 6 or 7 leagues from the Sea Nata is another such Town standing in a Plain near another branch of the same River In these Towns and some others on the same Coast they breed Hogs Fowls Bulls and Cows and plant Maize purposely for the support of Panama which is supplied with Provision mostly from other Towns and the neighbouring Islands The Beef and Fowl our Men took came to us in a good time for we had eaten but little Flesh since we left the Island Plata The Harbor where we careen'd was incompassed by three Islands and our Ships rode in the middle That on which we haled our Ships ashore was a little Island on the North side of the Harbor The was a fine small sandy Bay but all the rest of the Island was invironed with Rocks on which at low Water we did use to gather Oysters Clams Muscles and Limpits The Clam is a sort of Oyster which grows so fast to the Rock that there is no separating it from thence therefore we did open it where it grows and take out the Meat which is very large fat and sweet Here are a few common Oysters such as we have in England of which sort I have met with none in these Seas but here at Point Garachina at Puna and on the Mexican Coast in the lat of 23 d. North. I have a Manuscript of Mr. Teat Captain Swan's chief Mate which gives an account of Oysters plentifully found in Port St. Julian on the East side and somewhat to the North of the Streights of Magellan but there is no mention made of what Oysters they are Here are some Guanoes but we found no other sort of Land Animal Here are also some Pigeons and Turtle-Doves The rest of the Islands that incompass this Harbor had of all these sorts of Creatures Our Men therefore did every day go over in Canoas to them to fish fowl or hunt for Guanoes but having one Man surprized once by some Spaniards lying there in Ambush and carried off by them to Panama we were after that more cautious of straggling The 14th day of February 1685. we made an end of cleaning our Ship fill'd all our Water and stock'd our selves with Fire-wood The 15th day we went out from among the Islands and anchored in the Channel between them and the Main in 25 fathom Water fast oazy ground The Plate Fleet was not yet arrived therefore we intended to cruise before the City of Panama which is from this place about 25 leagues The next day we sailed towards Panama passing in the Channel between the Kings Islands and the Main It is very pleasant sailing here having the Main on one side which appears in divers forms It is beautified with many small Hills cloathed with Woods of divers sorts of Trees which are always green and flourishing There are some few small high Islands within a league of the Main scattering here and there one These are partly woody partly bare and they as well as the Main appear very pleasant The Kings Islands are on the other side of this Channel and make also a very lovely prospect as you sail by them These as I have already noted are low and flat appearing in several shapes according as they are naturally formed by many small Creeks and Branches of the Sea The 16th day we anchored at Pacheque in 17 fathom Water about a league from the Island and sailed from thence the next day with the Wind at N. N. E. directing our course towards Panama When we came abrest of Old Panama we anchored and sent our Canoa ashore with our Prisoner Don Diego de Pinas with a Letter to the Governor to treat about an Exchange for our Man they had spirited away as I said and another Captain Harris left in the River of St. Maria the year before coming over Land Don Diego was desirous to go on this Errand in the name and with the consent of the rest of our Spanish Prisoners but by some accident he was killed before he got ashore as we heard afterwards Old Panama was formerly a famous place but it was taken by Sir Henry Morgan about the year 1673. and at that time great part of it was burned to ashes and it was never re-edified since New Panama is a very fair City standing close by the Sea about 4 mile from the Ruines of the Old Town It gives name to a large Bay which is famous for a great many navigable Rivers some whereof are very rich in Gold it is also very pleasantly sprinkled with Islands that are not only profitable to their Owners but very delightful to the Passengers and Seamen that sail by them some of which I have already described It is incompassed on the backside with a pleasant Country which is full of small Hills and Valleys beautified with
we came I mean by the North West I know there have been divers attempts made about a North West Passage and all unsuccessful yet I am of opinion that such a Passage may be found All our Countrymen that have gone to discover the N. W. Passage have endeavoured to pass to the Westward beginning their search along Davis's or Hudsons Bay But if I was to go on this Discovery I would go first into the South Seas bend my course from thence along by California and that way seek a Passage back into the West Seas For as others have spent the Summer in first searching on this more known side nearer home and so before they got through the time of the year obliged them to give over their search and provide for a long course back again for fear of being left in the Winter on the contrary I would search first on the less known Coasts of the South Sea side and then as the year past away I should need no retreat for I should come farther into my knowledge if I succeeded in my attempt and should be without that dread and fear which the others must have in passing from the known to the unknown who for ought I know gave over their search just as they were on the point of accomplishing their desires I would take the same method if I was to go to discover the North East Passage I would winter about Japan Corea or the North East part of China and taking the Spring and Summer before me I would make my first Trial on the Coast of Tartary wherein if I succeeded I should come into some known parts and have a great deal of time before me to reach Archangel or some other Port. Captain Wood indeed says this North East Passage is not to be found for Ice but how often do we see that sometimes designs have been given over as impossible and at another time and by other ways those very things have been accomplished But enough of this The next day after that fatal Skirmish near Santa Pecaque Captain Swan ordered all our Water to be fill d and to get ready to sail The 21st day we sailed from hence directing our course towards California we had the Wind at N. W. and W. N. W. a small gale with a great Sea out of the West We past by 3 Islands called the Maria's After we past these Islands we had much Wind at N. N. W. and N. W. and at N. with thick rainy weather We beat till the 6th day of February but it was against a brisk Wind and proved labour in vain For we were now within reach of the Land Trade-wind which was opposite to us but would we go to California upon any Discovery or otherwise we should bear 60 or 70 leagues off from shore where we should avoid the Land-winds and have the benefit of the true Easterly Trade-wind Finding therefore that we got nothing but rather lost ground being then in 21 d. 5 m. N. we steered away more to the Eastward again for the Islands Maria's and the 7th day we came to an anchor at the East end of the middle Island in 8 fathom Water good clean Sand. The Maria's are three uninhabited Islands in lat 21 d. 40 m. they are distant from Cape St. Lucas on California 40 leagues bearing West South West and they are distant from Cape Corrientes 20 leagues bearing upon the same points of the Compass with Cape St. Lucas They stretch N. W. and S. E. about 14 leagues There are 2 or 3 small high Rocks near them The Westermost of them is the biggest Island of the three and they are all three of an indifferent heighth The soil is stony and dry the land in most places is covered with a shrubby sort of Wood very thick and troublesome to pass through In some places there is plenty of straight large Cedars though speaking of the places where I have found Cedars Chap. 3. I forgot to mention this place The Spaniards make mention of them in other places but I speak of those which I have seen All round by the Sea side it is sandy and there is produced a green prickly Plant whose leaves are much like the Penguin-leaf and the root like the root of a Seâ—…pervive but much larger This root being bak d in an Oven is good to eat and the Indians on California as I have been informed have great part of their subsistence from these roots We made an Oven in a sandy Bank and baked of these Roots and I eat of them but none of us greatly cared for them They taste exactly like the Roots of our English Burdocks boil'd of which I have eaten Here are plenty of Guanoes and Raccoons a large sort of Rat and Indian Conies and abundance of large Pigeons and Turtle-Doves The Sea is also pretty well stored with Fish and Turtle or Tortoise and Seal This is the second place on this Coast where I did see any Seal and this place helps to confirm what I have observed that they are seldom seen but where there is plenty of Fish Captain Swan gave the middle Island the Name of Prince George's Island The 8th day we run nearer the Island and anchored in 5 fathom and moored Head and Stern and unrigg d both Ship and Bark in order to careen Here Captain Swan proposed to go into the East Indies Many were well pleased with the Voyage but some thought such was their ignorance that he would carry them out of the world for about 2 thirds of our Men did not think there was any such way to be found but at last he gain'd their consents At our first coming hither we did eat nothing but Seal but after the first 2 or 3 days our Strikers brought aboard Turtle every day on which we fed all the time that we lay here and saved our Maiz for our Voyage Here also we measured all our Maiz and found we had about 80 Bushels This we divided into 3 parts one for the Bark and two for the Ship our Men were divided also 100 men aboard the Ship and 50 aboard the Bark besides 3 or 4 Slaves in each I had been a long time sick of a Dropsy a distemper whereof as I said before many of our men died so here I was laid and covered all but my head in the hot Sand I indured it near half an hour and then was taken out and laid to sweat in a Tent. I did sweat exceedingly while I was in the Sand and I do believe it did me much good for I grew well soon after We staid here till the 26th day and then both Vessels being clean we sailed to the Valley of Balderas to water for we could not do it here now In the wet Season indeed here is Water enough for the Brooks then run down plentifully but now though there was Water yet it was bad filling it being a great way to fetch it from the holes were it lodged The
largest Apple-trees It hath a spreading head full of branches and dark leaves The Fruit grows on the boughs like Apples it is as big as a Penny Loaf when VVheat is at 5 Shillings the Bushel It is of a round shape and hath a thick tough â—…ind VVhen the Fruit is ripe it is yellow and soft and the taste is sweet and pleasant The Natives of this Island use it for Bread they gather it when full grown while it is green and hard then they bake it in an Oven which scorcheth the rind and makes it black but they scrape off the outside black crust and there remains a tender thin crust and the inside is soft tender and white like the crumb of a Penny Loaf There is neither seed nor stone in the inside but all is of a pure substance like Bread it must be eaten new for if it is kept above 24 hours it becomes dry and eats harsh and choaky but 't is very pleasant before it is too stale This Fruit lasts in season 8 months in the year during which time the Natives eat no other sort of food of Bread kind I did never see of this Fruit any where but here The Natives told us that there is plenty of this Fruit growing on the rest of the Ladrone Islands and I did never hear of any of it any where else They have here some Rice also but the Island being of a dry soil and therefore not very proper for it they do not sow very much Fish is scarce about this Island yet on the Shole that our Bark came over there was great plenty and the Natives commonly go thither to fish The natives of this Island are strong bodied large limb'd and well shap'd They are Copper-coloured like other Indians their hair is black and long their Eyes meanly proportioned they have pretty high Noses their Lips are pretty full and their Teeth indifferent white They are long visaged and stern of countenance yet we found them to be affable and courteous They are many of them troubled with a kind of a Leprosie This distemper is very common at Mindanao therefore I shall speak more of it in my next Chapter They of Guam are otherwise very healthy especially in the dry season but in the wet season which comes in in June and holds till October the air is more thick and unwholsome which occasions Fevers but the rains are not violent nor lasting For the Island lyes so far Westerly from the Philippine Islands or any other Land that the Westerly winds do seldom blow so far and when they do they do not last long but the Easterly Winds do consiantly blow here which are dry and healthy and this Island is found to be very healthful as we were informed while we lay by it The natives are very ingenious beyond any people in making Boats or Proes as they are called in the East Indies and therein they take great delight These are built sharp at both ends the bottom is of one piece made like the bottom of a little Canoa very neatly dug and left of a good substance This bottom part is instead of a Keel It is about 26 or 28 foot long the under part of this Keel is made round but inclining to a wedge and smooth and the upper part is almost flat having a very gentle hollow and is about a foot broad From hence both sides of the Boat are carried up to about 5 foot high with narrow plank not above 4 or 5 inches broad and each end of the Boat turns up round very prettily But what is very singular one side of the Boat is made perpendicular like a Wall while the other side is rounding made as other Vessels are with a pretty full belly Just in the middle it is about 4 or 5 foot broad aloft or more according to the length of the Boat The Mast stands exactly in the middle with a long Yard that peeksup and down like a Mizen-yard One end of it reacheth down to the end or head of the Boat where it is placed in a notch that is made there purposely to receive it and keep it fast The other end hangs over the stern To this yard the sail is fastened At the foot of the sail there is another small yard to keep the sail out square and to roll up the sail on when it blows hard for it serves instead of a reef to take up the sail to what degree they please according to the strength of the Wind. Along the belly-side of the Boat parallel with it at about 6 or 7 foot distance lies another small Boat or Canoa being a Log of very light Wood almost as long as the great Boat but not so wide being not above a foot and an half wide at the upper part and very sharp like a wedge at each end And there are two Bamboas of about 8 or 10 foot long and as big as ones Leg placed over the great Boats side one near each end of it and reaching about 6 or 7 foot from the side of the Boat by the help of which the little Boat is made firm and contiguous to the other These are generally called by the Dutch and by the English from them Outlagers The use of them is to keep the great Boat upright from over-setting because the Wind here being in a manner constantly East or if it were at West it would be the same thing and the Range of these Islands where their business lies to and fro being mostly North and South they turn the flat side of the Boat against the Wind upon which they sail and the belly-side consequently with its little Boat is upon the Lee and the Vessel having a Head at each end so as to sail with either of them foremost indifferently they need not tack or go about as all our Vessels do but each end of the Boat serves either for head or stern as they please When they ply to windward and are minded to go about he that steers bears away a little from the Wind by which means the stern comes to the Wind which is now become the head only by shifting the end of the yard This Boat is steered with a broad Paddle instead of a Rudder I have been the more particular in describing these Boats because I do believe they sail the best of any Boats in the world I did here for my own satisfaction try the swiftness of one of them sailing by our Log we had 12 knots on our reel and she run it all out before the half minute glass was half out which if it had been no more is after the rate of 12 mile an hour but I do believe she would have run 24 mile an hour It was very pleasant to see the little Boat running along so swift by the others side The Native Indians are not less dexterous in managing than in building these Boats By report they will go from hence to another of the Ladrone
Islands about 30 leagues off and there do their business and return again in less than 12 hours I was told that one of these Boats was sent Express to Manila which is above 400 leagues and performed the Voyage in 4 days time There are of these Proes or Boats used in many places of the East Indies but with a Belly and a little Boat on each side Only at Mindanao I saw one like these with the belly and little Boat only on one side and the other flat but not so neatly built The Indians of Guam have neat little Houses very handsomely thatch'd with Palmeto-thatch They inhabit together in Villages built by the Sea on the West side and have Spanish Priests to instruct them in the Christian Religion The Spaniards have a small Fort on the West side near the South end with 6 Guns in it There is a Governour and 20 or 30 Spanish Souldiers There are no more Spaniards on the Island beside 2 or 3 Priests Not long before we arriv'd here the Natives rose on the Spaniards to destroy them and did kill many but the Governour with his Souldiers at length prevailed and drove them out of the Fort So when they found themselves disappointed of their intent they destroyed the Plantations and stock and then went away to other Islands There were then 3 or 400 Indians on this Island but now there are not above 100 for all that were in this Conspiracy went away As for these who yet remain if they were not actually concerned in that broil yet their hearts also are bent against the Spaniards for they offered to carry us to the Fort and assist us in the Conquest of the Island but C. Swan was not for molesting the Spaniards here Before we came to an anchor here one of the Priests came aboard in the night with 3 Indians They first hailed us to know from whence we came and what we were to whom answer was made in Spanish that we were Spaniards and that we came from Acapulco It being dark they could not see the make of our Ship nor very well discern what we were Therefore they came aboard but perceiving the mistake that they were in in taking us for a Spanish Ship they endeavoured to get from us again but we held their Boat fast and made them come in Captain Swan received the Priest with much civility and conducting him into the great Cabbin declared that the reason of our coming to this Island was want of Provision and that he came not in any hostile manner but as a friend to purchase with his Money what he wanted and therefore desired the Priest to write a Letter to the Governor to inform him what we were and on what account we came For having him now aboard the Captain was willing to detain him as an Hostage till we had Provision The Padre told Captain Swan that Provision was now scarce on the Island but he would engage that the Governour would do his utmost to furnish us In the morning the Indians in whose Boat or Prow the Frier came aboard were sent to the Governour with 2 Letters one from the Frier and another very obliging one from Captain Swan and a Present of 4 yards of Scarlet-cloath and a piece of broad Silver and Gold Lace The Governor lives near the South end of the Island on the West side which was about 5 leagues from the place where we were therefore we did not expect an answer till the evening not knowing then how nimble they were Therefore when the Indian Canoa was dispatched away to the Governor we hoised out 2 of our Canoas and sent one a fishing and the other ashore for Coco-nuts Our fishing Canoa got nothing but the Men that went ashore for Coco-nuts came off laden About 11 a clock that same morning the Governor of the Island sent a Letter to Captain Swan complimenting him for his Present and promising to support us with as much Provision as he could possibly spare and as a token of his gratitude he sent a Present of 6 Hogs of a small sort most excellent Meat the best I think that ever I eat they are fed with Coco-nuts and their flesh is hard as Brisket Beef They were doubtless of that breed in America which came originally from Spain He sent also 12 Muskmelons larger than ours in England and as many Water-melons both sorts here being a very excellent Fruit and sent an order to the Indians that lived in a Village not far from our Ship to bake every day as much of the Bread-fruit as we did desire and to assist us in getting as many dry Coco-nuts as we would have which they accordingly did and brought off the Bread-fruit every day hot as much as we could eat After this the Governour sent every day a Canoa or two with Hogs and Fruit and desired for the same Powder Shot and Arms which was sent according to his request We had a delicate large English Dog which the Governour did desire and had it given him very freely by the Captain though much against the grain of many of his Men who had a great value for that Dog Captain Swan endeavoured to get this Governours Letter of Recommendation to some Merchants at Manila for he had then a design to go to Fort St. George and from thence intended to trade to Manila but this his design was concealed from the company While we lay here the Acapulco Ship arrived in sight of the Island but did not come in sight of us for the Governour sent an Indian Proe with advice of our being here Therefore she stood off to the South-ward of the Island and coming foul of the same shole that our Bark had run over before was in great danger of being lost there for she struck off her Rudder and with much ado got clear but not till after three days labour For tho the shole be so near the Island and the Indians go off and fish there every day yet the Master of the Acapulco Ship who should one would think know these parts was utterly ignorant of it This their striking on the shole we heard afterward when we were on the Coast of Manila but these Indians of Guam did speak of her being in sight of the Island while we lay there which put our men in a great heat to go out after her but Captain Swan perswaded them out of that humour for he was now wholly averse to any hostile action The 30th day of May the Governour sent his last Present which was some Hogs a Jar of pickled Mangoes a Jar of excellent pickled Fish and a Jar of fine Rusk or Bread of fine Wheat Flower baked like Bisket but not so hard He sent besides 6 or 7 packs of Rice desiring to be excused from sending any more Provision to us saying he had no more on the Island that he could spare He sent word also that the West Monsoon was at hand that therefore it behoved
the S. E. end of the Island Mindanao we saw two small Islands about 3 leagues distant from it We might have passed between them and the main Island as we learnt since but not knowing them nor what dangers we might encounter there we chose rather to sail to the Eastward of them But meeting very strong Westerly Winds we got nothing forward in many days In this time we first saw the Islands Meangis which are about 16 leagues distant from the Mindanao bearing S. E. I shall have occasion to speak more of them hereafter The 4th day of July we got into a deep Bay 4 leagues N. W. from the two small Islands before mentioned But the night before in a violent Tornado our Bark being unable to beat any longer bore away which put us in some pain for fear she was overset as we had like to have been our selves We anchored on the South West side of the Bay in 15 fathom Water about a Cables length from the shore Here we were forced to shelter our selves from the violence of the Weather which was so boisterous with Rains and Tornadoes and a strong Westerly Wind that we were very glad to find this place to anchor in being the only shelter on this side from the West Winds This Bay is not above two mile wide at the mouth but farther in it is 3 leagues wide and 7 leagues deep running in N. N. W. There is a good depth of Water about 4 or 5 leagues in but rocky foul ground for above 2 leagues in from the mouth on both sides of the Bay except only in that place where we lay About 3 leagues in from the mouth on the Eastern side there are fair sandy Bays and very good anchoring in 4 5 and 6 fathom The Land on the East side is high mountainous and woody yet very well watered with small Brooks and there is one River large enough for Canoas to enter On the West side of the Bay the Land is of a mean heighth with a large Savannah bordering on the Sea and stretching from the mouth of the Bay a great way to the Westward This Savannah abounds with long Grass and it is plentifully stock'd with Deer The adjacent Woods are a covert for them in the heat of the day but mornings and evenings they feed in the open Plains as thick as in our Parks in England I never saw any where such plenty of wild Deer tho I have met with them in several parts of America both in the North and South Seas The Deer live here pretty peaceably and unmolested for there are no Inhabitants on that side of the Bay We visited this Savannah every morning and killed as many Deer as we pleased sometimes 16 or 18 in a day and we did eat nothing but Venison all the time we staid here We saw a great many Plantations by the sides of the Mountains on the East side of the Bay and we went to one of them in hopes to learn of the Inhabitants whereabouts the City was that we might not over-sail it in the night but they fled from us We lay here till the 12th day before the Winds abated of their fury and then we sailed from hence directing our course to the Westward In the morning we had a Land Wind at North. At 11 a clock the Sea breeze came at West just in our Teeth but it being fair weather we kept on our way turning and taking the advantage of the Land breezes by night and the Sea breezes by day Being now past the S. E. part of the Island we coasted down on the South side and we saw abundance of Canoas a fishing and now and then a small Village Neither were these Inhabitants afraid of us as the former but came aboard yet we could not understand them nor they us but by signs and when we mentioned the word Mindanao they would point towards it The 18th day of July we arrived before the River of Mindanao the mouth of which lies in lat 6 d. 22 m. No. and is laid in 231 d. 12 m. Longitude West from the Lizard in England We anchored right against the River in 15 fathom water clear hard Sand about 2 miles from the shore and 3 or 4 miles from a small Island that lay without us to the Southward We fired 7 or 9 Guns I remember not well which and were answered again with 3 from the shore for which we gave one again Immediately after our coming to an anchor Raja Laut and one of the Sultans Sons came off in a Canoa being rowed with 10 Oars and demanded in Spanish what we were and from whence we came Mr. Smith he who was taken Prisoner at Leon in Mexico answered in the same Language that we were English and that we had been a great while out of England They told us that we were welcom and asked us a great many questions about England especially concerning our East India Merchants and whether we were sent by them to settle a Factory here Mr. Smith told them that we came hither only to buy provision They seemed a little discontented when they understood that we were not come to settle among them for they had heard of our arrival on the East side of the Island a great while before and entertained hopes that we were sent purposely out of England hither to settle a trade with them which it should seem they are very desirous of For Captain Goodlud had been here not long before to treat with them about it and when he went away told them as they said that in a short time they might expect an Ambassadour from England to make a full bargain with them Indeed upon mature thoughts I should think we could not have done better than to have complied with the desire they seemed to have of our settling here and to have taken up our quarters among them For as thereby we might better have consulted our own profit and satisfaction than by the other loose roving way of life so it might probably have proved of publick benefit to our Nation and been a means of introducing an English Settlement and Trade not only here but through several of the Spice-Islands which lye in its neighbourhood For the Islands Meangis which I mentioned in the beginning of this Chapter lye within 20 leagues of Mindanao These are 3 small Islands that abound with Gold and Cloves if I may credit my Author Prince Jeoly who was born on one of them and was at this time a Slave in the City of Mindanao He might have been purchased by us of his Master for a small matter as he was afterwards by Mr. Moody who came hither to Trade and laded a Ship with Clove Bark and by transporting him home to his own Country we might have gotten a Trade there But of Prince Jeoly I shall speak more hereafter These Islands are as yet probably unknown to the Dutch who as I said before indeavour to ingross all
we had a fresh Land Wind and steered away South passing between the 2 Shoals which we saw the day before These Shoals lye in lat 3 d. South and about 10 leagues from the Island Celebes Being past them the Wind died away and we lay decalmed till the afternoon Then we had a hard Tornado out of the South West and towards the evening we saw two or three Spouts the first I had seen since I came into the East Indies in the West Indies I had often met with them A Spout is a small ragged piece or part of a Cloud hanging down about a yard seemingly from the blackest part thereof Commonly it hangs down sloping from thence or sometimes appearing with a small bending or elbow in the middle I never saw any hang perpendicularly down It is small at the lower end seeming no bigger than ones Arm but 't is fuller towards the Cloud from whence it proceeds When the surface of the Sea begins to work you shall see the Water for about 100 paces in circumference foam and move gently round till the whirling motion increases and then it flies upward in a pillar about 100 paces in compass at the bottom but lessening gradually upwards to the smallness of the Spout it self there where it reacheth the lower end of the Spout through which the rising Sea-water seems to be conveyed into the Clouds This visibly appears by the Clouds increasing in bulk and blackness Then you shall presently see the Cloud drive along although before it seemed to be without any motion the Spout also keeping the same course with the Cloud and still sucking up the Water as it goes along and they make a Wind as they go Thus it continues for the space of half an hour more or less until the sucking is spent and then breaking off all the Water which was below the Spout or pendulous piece of Cloud falls down again into the Sea making a great noise with its fall and clashing motion in the Sea It is very dangerous for a Ship to be under a Spout when it breaks therefore we always endeavoured to shun it by keeping at a distance if possibly we can But for want of Wind to carry us away we are often in great fear and danger for it is usually calm when Spouts are at work except only just where they are Therefore men at Sea when they see a Spout coming and know not how to avoid it do sometimes fire shot out of their great Guns into it to give it air or vent that so it may break but I did never hear that it proved to be of any benefit And now being on this subject I think it not amiss to give you an account of an accident that happened to a Ship once on the Coast of Guinea some time in or about the year 1674. One Captain Records of London bound for the Coast of Guinea in a Ship of 300 Tuns and 16 Guns called the Blessing when he came into the lat 7 or 8 degrees North he saw several Spouts one of which came directly towards the Ship and he having no Wind to get out of the way of the Spout made ready to receive it by furling his sails It came on very swift and broke a little before it reached the Ship making a great noise and raising the Sea round it as if a great house or some such thing had been cast into the Sea The fury of the Wind still lasted and took the Ship on the Starboard bow with such violence that it snapt off the Boltsprit and Fore-mast both at once and blew the Ship all along ready to over-set it but the Ship did presently right again and the Wind whirling round took the Ship a second time with the like fury as before but on the contrary side and was again like to overset her the other way The Mizen-mast felt the fury of this second blast and was snapt short off as the Fore-mast and Bolt-sprit had been before The Main-mast and Main-top-mast received no damage for the fury of the Wind which was presently over did not reach them Three men were in the Fore-top when the Fore-mast broke and one on the Boltsprit and fell with them into the Sea but all of them were saved I had this relation from Mr. John Canby who was then Quarter-master and Steward of her one Ahraham Wise was chief Mate and Leonard Jefferies second Mate We are usually very much afraid of them yet this was the only damage that ever I heard done by them They seem terrible enough the rather because they come upon you while you lie becalm'd like a Log in the Sea and cannot get out of their way but though I have seen and been beset by them often yet the fright was always the greatest of the harm December the 1st we had a gentle gale at E. S. E. we steered South and at noon I was by Observation in lat 3 d. 34 m. South Then we saw the Island Bouton bearing South West and about 10 leagues distant We had very uncertain and unconstant Winds The Tornadoes came out of the S. W. which was against us and what other Winds we had were so saint that they did us little kinndess but we took the advantage of the smallest gale and got a little way every day The 4th day at noon I was by Observation in Lat. 4 d. 30 m. South The 5th day we got close by the N. W. end of the Island Bouton and in the evening it being fair weather we hoised out our Canoa and sent the Moskito men of whom we had 2 or 3 to strike Turtle for here are plenty of them but they being shy we chose to strike them in the night which is customary in the West Indies also For every time they come up to breathe which is once in 8 or 10 minutes they blow so hard that one may hear them at 30 or 40 yards distance by which means the Striker knows where they are and may more easily approach them than in the day for the Turtle sees bettter than he hears but on the contrary the Manatee's hearing is quickest In the morning they returned with a very large Turtle which they took near the shore and withal an Indian of the Island came aboard with them He spake the Malayan Language by which we did understand him He told us that 2 leagues farther to the Southward of us there was a good Harbour in which we might Anchor So having a fair Wind we got thither by noon This Harbour is in Lat. 4 d. 54 m. South lying on the East side of the Island Bouton Which Island lyes near the S. E. end of the Island Celebes distant from it about 3 or 4 leagues It is of a long form stretching S. W. and N. E. about 25 leagues long and 10 broad It is pretty high Land and appears pretty even and flat and very woody There is a large Town within a league of the anchoring
Mindanaian make for our own use which our Carpenters afterwards altered and made a delicate Boat fit for any service She was sharp at both ends but we saw'd off one and made that end flat fastening a Rudder to it and she rowed and sailed incomparably We stayed here but till the 12th day because it was a bad Harbour and foul ground and a bad time of the year too for the Tornadoes began to come in thick and strong When we went to weigh our Anchor it was hooked in a Rock and we broke our Cable and could not get our Anchor though we strove hard for it so we went away and left it there We had the Wind at N. N. E. and we steered towards the S. E. and fell in with 4 or 5 small Islands that lye in 5 d. 40 m. South lat and about 5 or 6 leagues from Callasusung Harbour These Islands appeared very green with Coco-nut Trees and we saw two or three Towns on them and heard a Drum all night for we were got in among shoals and could not get out again till the next day We know not whether the Drum were for fear of us or that they were making merry as 't is usual in these parts to do all the night singing and dancing till morning We found a pretty strong Tide here the flood setting to the Southward and the ebb to the Northward These shoals and many other that are not laid down in our Drafts lye on the South West side of the Islands where we heard the Drum about a league from them At last we past between the Islands and tried for a passage on the East side We met with divers shoals on this side also but found Channels to pass through so we steered away for the Island Timor intending to pass out by it We had the Winds commonly at W. S. W. and S. W. hard gales and rainy weather The 16th day we got clear of the shoals and steered S. by E. with the Wind at W. S. W. but veering every half hour sometimes at S. W. and then again at W. and sometimes at N. N. VV. bringing much Rain with Thunder and Lightening The 20th day we passed by the Island Omba which is a pretty high Island lying in lat 8 d. 20 m. and not above 5 or 6 leagues from the N. E. part of the Island Timor It is about 13 or 14 leagues long and five or six leagues wide About 7 or 8 leagues to the VVest of Omba is another pretty large Island but it had no name in our plats yet by the situation it should be that which in some Maps is called Pentare We saw on it abundance of smoaks by day and fires by night and a large Town on the North side of it nor far from the Sea but it was such bad weather that we did not go ashore Between Omba and Pentare and in the mid Channel there is a small low sandy Island with great shoals on either side but there is a very good Channel close by Pentare between that and the shoals about the small Isle We were three days beating off and on not having a wind for it was at South South West The 23d day in the evening having a small gale at North we got through keeping close by Pentare The Tide of ebb here set out to the Southward by which we were helped through for we had but little wind But this Tide which did us a kindness in setting us through had like to have ruined us afterwards for there are two small Islands lying at the South end of the Channel we came through and towards these Islands the Tide hurried us so swiftly that we very narrowly escaped being driven ashore for the little wind we had before at North dying away we had not one breath of wind when we came there neither was there an anchor ground But we got out our Oars and rowed yet all in vain for the Tide set wholly on one of the small Islands that we were forced with might and main strength to bear off the Ship by thrusting with our Oars against the shore which was a steep bank and by this means we presently drove away clear of Danger and having a little wind in the night at North we steered away S. S. W. In the morning again we had the wind at W. S. W. and steered S. and the wind coming to the W. N. W. we steered S. W. to get clear of the S. W. end of the Island Timor The 26th day we saw the N. W. point of Timor S. E. by E. distant about 8 leagues Timor is a long high mountainous Island stretching N. E. and S. VV. It is about 70 leagues long and 15 or 16 wide the middle of the Island is in Lat. about 9 d. South I have been informed that the Portuguese do trade to this Island but I know nothing of its produce besides Coire for making Cables of which there is mention Chap. X. The 27th day we saw two small Islands which lye near the S. W. end of Timor They bear from us S. E. We had very hard gales of wind and still with a great deal of Rain the wind at W. and W. S. W. Being now clear of all the Islands we stood off South intending to touch at New Holland a part of Terra Australis Incognita to see what that Country would afford us Indeed as the Winds were we could not now keep our intended course which was first Westerly and then Northerly without going to New Holland unless we had gone back again among the Islands but this was not a good time of the year to be among any Islands to the South of the Equator unless in a good Harbour The 31st day we were in lat 13 d. 20 m. still standing to the Southward the wind bearing commonly very hard at W. and we keeping upon it under 2 courses and our Mizen and sometimes a Main-top-sail rift About 10 a clock at night we tackt and stood to the Northward for fear of running on a shoal which is laid down in our Drafts in lat 13 d. 50 m. or thereabouts it bearing S. by W. from the East end of Timor and so the Island bore from us by our judgments and reckoning At 3 a clock we tackt again and stood S. by W. and S. S. W. In the morning assoon as it was day we saw the shoal right ahead it lies in 13 d. 50 m. by all our reckonings It is a small spit of hand just appearing above the waters edge with several Rocks about it 8 or 10 foot high above water It lies in a triangular form each side being about a league and half We stemm'd right with the middle of it and stood within half a mile of the Rocks and sounded but found no ground Then we went about and stood to the North 2 hours and then tackt and stood to the Southward again thinking to weather it but could not So
us at last the Captain ordered the Drum to be beaten which was done of a sudden with much vigor purposely to scare the poor Creatures They hearing the noise ran away as fast as they could drive and when they ran away in haste they would cry Gurry Gurry speaking deep in the Throat Those Inhabitants also that live on the Main would always run away from us yet we took several of them For as I have already observed they had such bad Eyes that they could not see us till we came close to them We did always give them victuals and let them go again but the Islanders after our first time of being among them did not stir for us When we had been here about a week we hal'd our Ship into a small sandy Cove at a Spring-tide as far as she would sloat and at low Water she was left dry and the sand dry without us near half a mile for the Sea riseth and falleth here about 5 fathom The Flood runs North by East and the Ebb South by West All the Neep-tides we lay wholly a ground for the Sea did not come near us by about a hundred yards We had therefore time enough to clean our Ships bottom which we did very well Most of our Men lay ashore in a Tent where our Sails were mending and our Strikers brought home Turtle and Manatee every day which was our constant food While we lay here I did endeavour to perswade our men to go to some English Factory but was threatened to be turned ashore and left here for it This made me desist and patiently wait for some more convenient place and opportunity to leave them than here Which I did hope I should accomplish in a short time because they did intend when they went from hence to bear down towards Cape Comorin In their way thither they design'd also to visit the Island Cocos which lyeth in Lat. 12 d. 12 m. North by our Drafts hoping there to find of that Fruit the Island having it name from thence CHAP. XVII Leaving New-Holland they pass by the Island Cocos and touch at another Woody Island near it A Land Animal like large Craw-fish Coco-Nuts floating in the Sea The Island Triste bearing Coco's yet over-flown every Spring-tide They anchor at a small Island near that of Nassaw Hog Island and others A Proe taken belonging to Achin Nicobar Island and the rest called by that Name Ambergrease good and bad The manners of the Inhabitants of these Islands They anchor at Nicobar Isle It s Situation Soil and pleasant Mixture of its Bays Trees c. The Melory tree and Fruit used for bread The Natives of Nicobar Island their Form Habit Language Habitations no form of Religion or Government Their Food and Canoas They clean the Ship The Author projects and gets leave to stay ashore here and with him two Englishmen more the Portuguese and 4 Malayans of Achin Their first Rencounters with the Natives Of the common Traditions concerning Cannibals or Man-Eaters Their Entertainment ashore They buy a Canoa to transport them over to Achin but overset her at first going cut Having recruited and improved her they set out again for the East side of the Island They have a War with the Islanders but Peace being re-established they lay in stores and make Preparations for their Voyage MArch the 12th 1688. we sailed from New Holland with the Wind at N. N. W. and fair weather We directed our course to the Northward intending as I said to touch at the Island Cocos but we met with the Winds at N. W. W. N. W. and N N. W. for several days which obliged us to keep a more Easterly course than was convenient to find that Island We had soon after our setting out very bad weather with much Thunder and Lightning Rain and high blustring Winds It was the 26th day of March before we were in the lat of the Island Cocos which is in 12 d. 12 m. and then by judgment we were 40 or 50 leagues to the East of it and the Wind was now at S. W. Therefore we did rather chuse to bear away towards some Islands on the West side of Sumatra than to beat against the Wind for the Island Cocos I was very glad of this being in hopes to make my escape from them to Sumatra or some other place We met nothing of remark in this Voyage beside the catching two great Sharks till the 28th day Then we fell in with a small woody Island in Lat. 10 d. 30 m. Its Longitude from New Holland from whence we came was by my account 12 d. 6 m. West It was deep water about the Island and therefore no anchoring but we sent 2 Canoas ashore one of them with the Carpenters to cut a Tree to make another Pump the other Canoa went to search for fresh water and found a fine small Brook near the S. W. point of the Island but there the Sea fell in on the ashore so high that they could not get it off At noon both our Canoas returned aboard and the Carpenters brought aboard a good Tree which they afterwards made a Pump with such a one as they made at Mindanao The other Canoa brought aboard as many Boobies and Men of War Birds as sufficed all the Ships Company when they were boiled They got also a sort of Land Animal somewhat resembling a large Craw-fish without its great Claws These creatures lived in holes in the dry sandy ground like Rabbits Sir Francis Drake in his Voyage round the world makes mention of such that he found at Ternate or some other of the Spice Islands or near them They were very good sweet Meat and so large that 2 of them were more than a Man could eat being almost as thick as ones Leg. Their Shells were of a dark brown but red when boiled This Island is of a good heighth with steep Cliffs against the S. and S. W. and a sandy Bay on the North side but very deep water steep to the shore The Mold is blackish the Soil fat producing large Trees of divers sorts About one a clock in the Afternoon we made sail from this Island with the wind at S. W. and we steered N. W. Afterwards the winds came about at N. W. and continued between the W. N. W. and the N. N. W. several days I observed that the winds blew for the most part out of the West or N. W. and then we had always rainy weather with Tornadoes and much Thunder and Lightning but when the wind came any way to the Southward it blew but faint and brought fair weather We met nothing of remark till the 7th day of April and then being in Lat. 7 d. S. we saw thâ—… Land of Sumatra at a great distance bearing North. The 8th day we saw the East end of the Island Sumatra very plainly we being then in Lat. 6 d. S. The 10th day being in Lat. 5 d. 11 m. and about 7
received this information by a Letter from the Frier that Captain Weldon brought away from thence But to proceed The 5th day of May we ran down on the West side of the Island Nicobar properly so called and anchored at the N. W. end of it in a small Bay in 8 fathom water not half a mile from the shore The body of this Island is in 7 d. 30 m. North Lat. it is about 12 leagues long and 3 or 4 broad The South end of it is pretty high with steep Cliffs against the Sea the rest of the Island is low flat and even The mold of it is black and deep and it is very well watered with small running streams It produceth abundance of tall Trees fit for any uses for the whole bulk of it seems to be but one entire Grove But that which adds most to its beauty off at Sea are the many spots of Coco-nut Trees which grow round it in every small Bay The Bays are half a mile or a mile long more or less and these Bays are intercepted or divided from each other with as many little rocky points of VVoodland As the Coco-nut Trees do thus grow in Groves fronting to the Sea in the Bays so there is another sort of Fruit Tree in the Bays bordering on the backside of the Coco Trees farther from the Sea It is called by the Natives a Melory Tree This Tree is as big as our large Apple Trees and as high It hath a blackish rind and a pretty broad leaf The Fruit is as big as the Bread-fruit at Guam described in Chapter X. or a large Penny Loaf It is shaped like a Pear and hath a pretty tough smooth rind of a light green colour The inside of the Fruit is in substance much like an Apple but full of small strings as big as a brown thread I did never see of these Trees any where but here The Natives of this Island are tall well-limb'd Men pretty long visaged with black Eyes their Noses middle proportioned and the whole Symmetry of their Faces agreeing very well Their Hair is black and lank and their Skins of a dark copper colour The Women have no Hair on their Eye-brows I do believe it is pluckt up by the roots for the Men had Hair growing on their Eye-brows as other People The Men go all naked save only a long narrow piece of cloath or Sash which going round their Wastes and thence down between their Thighs is brought up behind and tuckt in at that part which goes about the Waste The Women have a kind of a short Petticoat reaching from their Waste to their Knees Their Language was different from any that I had ever heard before yet they had some few Malayan words and some of them had a word or two of Portuguese which probably they might learn aboard of their Ships passing by this place for when these Men see a Sail they do presently go aboard of them in their Canoas I did not perceive any Form of Religion that they had they had neither Temple nor Idol nor any manner of outward veneration to any Deity that I did see They inhabit all round the Island by the Sea side in the Bays there being 4 or 5 Houses more or less in each Bay Their Houses are built on Posts as the Mindanaians are They are small low and of a square form There is but one Room in each House and this Room is about 8 foot from the ground and from thence the roof is raised about 8 foot higher But instead of a sharp ridge the top is exceeding neatly arched with small Rafters about the bigness of a Mans Arm bent round like a Half-Moon and very curiously thatched with Palmeto-leaves They live under no Government that I could perceive for they seem to be equal without any distinction every Man ruling in his own House Their Plantations are only those Coco-nut Trees which grow by the Sea side there being no cleared Land farther in on the Island for I observ'd that when past the Fruit Trees there were no paths to be seen going into the Woods The greatest use which they make of their Coco-Trees is to draw Toddy from them of which they are very fond The Melory Trees seem to grow wild they have great Earthen Pots to boil the Melory Fruit in which will hold 12 or 14 Gallons These Pots they fill with the Fruit and putting in a little water they cover the mouth of the Pot with leaves to keep in the steam while it boils When the Fruit is soft they peel off the rind and scrape the pulp from the strings with a flat stick made like a Knife and then make it up in great lumps as big as a Holland Cheese and then it will keep 6 or 7 days It looks yellow and tastes well and is their chiefest food for they have no Yams Potatoes Rice nor Plantains except a very few yet they have a few small Hogs and a very few Cocks and Hens like ours The Men imploy themselves in Fishing but I did not see much Fish that they got every House hath at least 2 or 3 Canoas belonging to it which they draw up ashore The Canoas that they go a fishing in are sharp at both ends and both the sides and the bottom are very thin and smooth They are shaped somewhat like the Proes at Guam with one side flattish and the other with a pretty big belly and they have small slight Outlagers on one side Being thus thin and light they are better managed with Oars than with Sails yet they sail well enought and are steer'd with a Paddle There commonly go 20 or 30 Men in one of these Canoas and seldom fewer than 9 or 10. Their Oars are short and they do not paddle but row with them as we do The Benches they sit on when they row are made of split Bambo's laid across and so near together that they look like a Deck The Bambos lie moveable so that when any go in to row they take up a Bambo in the place where they would sit and lay it by to make room for their Legs The Canoas of those of the rest of these Islands were like those of Nicobar and probably they were alike in other things for we saw no difference at all in the Natives of them who came hither while we were here But to proceed with our affairs it was as I said before the 5th day of May about 10 in the morning when we anchored at this Island Captain Read immediately ordered his Men to heel the Ship in order to clean her which was done this day and the next All the Water Vessels were fill'd they intending to go to Sea at night for the winds being yet at N. N. E. the Captain was in hopes to get over to Cape Comorin before the wind shifted Otherwise it would have been somewhat difficult for him to get thither because the Westerly Monsoon was now at hand I thought
not altogether destitute of small Hills and every where of a moderate heighth and a Champion Country naturally very fit for Cultivation There is one Hill more remarkable than ordinary especially to Seamen The English call it the Golden Mount but whether this name is given it by the Natives or only by the English I know not 'T is near the N. W. end of the Island and Achin stands but 5 or 6 mile from the bottom of it 'T is very large at the foot and runs up smaller towards the head which is raised so high as to be seen at Sea 30 or 40 leagues This was the first Land that we saw coming in our Proe from the Nicobar Islands mentioned in my former Voyage The rest of the Land tho of a good heighth was then undiscerned by us so that this Mountain appeared like an Island in the Sea which was the Reason why our Achin Malayans took it for Pulo Way But that Island tho pretty high Champion Land was invisible when this Golden Mount appeared so plain tho as far distant as that Island Besides what belongs to Achin upon the Continent there are also several Islands under its Jurisdiction most of them uninhabited and these make the Road of Achin Among them is this Pulo Way which is the Easternmost of a Range of Islands that lye off the N. W. end of Sumatra It is also the largest of them and it is inhabited by Malefactors who are banisht thither from Achin This with the other Islands of this Range lye in a semicircular form of about 7 Leagues diameter Pulo Gomez is another large Island about 20 mile West from Pulo Way and about 3 Leagues from the N. W. point of Sumatra Between Pulo Gomez and the Main are 3 or 4 other small Islands yet with Channels of a sufficient breadth between them for Ships to pass through and they have very deep water All Ships bound from Achin to the Westward or coming from thence to Achin go in and out thro one or other of these Channels and because shipping comes hither from the Coast of Surrat one of these Channels which is deeper than the rest is called the Surrat Channel Between Pulo Gomez and Pulo Way in the bending of the Circle there are other small Islands the chief of which is called Pulo Rondo This is a small round high Island not a above 2 or 3 mile in circumference It lyes almost in the extremity of the bending on the N. E. part of the Circle but nearer Pulo Way than Pulo Gomez There are large deep Channels on either side but the most frequented is the Channel on the West side Which is called the Bengal Channel because it looks towards that Bay and Ships coming from thence from the Coast of Coromandel pass in and out this way Between Pulo Way and the Main of Sumatra is another Channel of 3 or 4 Leagues wide which is the Channel for Ships that go from Achin to the Streights of Malacca or any Country to the East of those Streights and vice versa There is good riding in all this Semicircular Bay between the Islands and Sumatra but the Road for all Ships that come to Achin is near the Sumatra Shore within all the Islands There they anchor at what distances they please according to the Monsoons or Seasons of the Year There is a small Navigable River comes out into the Sea by which Ships transport their Commodities in smaller Vessels up to the City The mouth of this River is 6 or 7 Leagues from Pulo Rondo and 3 or 4 from Pulo Way and near as many from Pulo Gomez The Islands are pretty high Champion Land the mould black or yellow the Soyl deep and fat producing large tall Trees fit for any uses There are brooks of water on the 2 great Islands of Way and Gomez and several sorts of wild Animals especially wild Hogs in abundance The Mold of this Continent is different according to the natural position of it The Mountains are Rocky especially those towards the West Coast yet most that I have seen seems to have a superficial covering of Earth naturally producing Shrubs small Trees or pretty good Grass The small Hills are most of them cloathed with Woods the Trees whereof seem by their growth to spring from a fruitful Soyl the Champion Land such as I have seen is some black some grey some reddish and all of a deep mold But to be very particular in these things especially in all my Travels is more than Ican pretend to tho it may be I took as much notice of the difference of Soil as I met with it as most Travellers have done having been bred in my youth in Somersetshire at a place called East Coker near Yeovil or Evil In which Parish there is as great variety of Soil as I have ordinarily met with any where viz. black red yellow sandy stony clay morass or swampy c. I had the more reason to take notice of this because this Village in a great measure is Let out in small Leases for Lives of 20 30 40 or 50 pound per Ann. under Coll. Helliar the Lord of the Mannor and most if not all these Tenants had their own Land scattering in small pieces up and down several sorts of Land in the Parish so that every one had some piece of every sort of Land his Black ground his Sandy Clay c. some of 20 30 or 40 Shillings an Acre for some uses and other not worth 10 groats an Acre My Mother being possest of one of these Leases and having of all these sorts of Land I came acquainted with them all and knew what each sort would produce viz. Wheat Barley Massin Rice Beans Peas Oats Fetches Flax or Hemp in all which I had a more than usual knowledge for one so young taking a particular delight in observing it but enough of this matter The Kingdom of Achin has in general a deep mould It is very well watered with Brooks and small Rivers but none navigable for Ships of burthen This of Achin admits not of any but small Vessels The Land is some part very woody in other places Savannah the Trees are of divers sorts most unknown to me by name The Cotton and Cabbage-trees grow here but not in such plenty as in some part of America These Trees commonly grow here as indeed usually where-ever they grow in a champion dry ground such at least as is not drowned or morassy for here is some such Land as that by the Rivers and there grow Mangrove Trees and other Trees of that kind Neither is this Kingdom destitute of Timber-trees fit for building The Fruits of this Country are Plantains Bonanoes Guava's Oranges Limes Jacks Durians Coco-nuts Pumple noses Pomgranates Mangoes Mangastans Citrons Water melons Musk-melons Pine-apples c. Of all these sorts of Fruits I think the Mangastan is without compare the most delicate This Fruit is in shape much like the Pomgranate but a
great deal less The outside rind or shell is a little thicker than that of the Pomgranate but softer yet more brittle and and is of a dark red The inside of the shell is of a deep crimson colour Within this shell the Fruit appears in 3 or 4 Cloves about the bigness of the top of a man's thumb These will easily separate each from the other they are as white as Milk very soft and juicy inclosing a small black Stone or Kernel The outside rind is said to be binding and therefore many when they eat the Fruit which is very delicious do save the rind or shell drying it and preserving it to give to such as have Fluxes In a small Book entitled A new Voyage to the East Indies there is mention made of Mangastans among the Fruits of Java but the Author is mistaken in that he compares it to a Sloe in shape and taste Yet I remember there is such a sort of Fruit at Achin and believe by the description he gives of it it may probably be the same that he calls the Mangastan tho nothing like the true Mangastan The Pumple-nose is a large Fruit like a Citron with a very thick tender uneven rind The inside is full of Fruit it grows all in cloves as big as a small Barly-corn and these are all full of juice as an Orange or a Lemon tho not growing in such partitions 'T is of a pleasant taste and tho there are of them in other parts of the East Indies yet these at Achin are accounted the best They are ripe commonly about Christmas and they are so much esteemed that English men carry them from hence to Fort St George and make presents of them to their Friends there The other Fruits mentioned here are most of them described by me in my first Volume The eatable Roots of this Country are Yams and Potatoes c. but their chiefest bread kind is Rice The Natives have lately planted some quantities of this Grain and might produce much more were they so disposed the Land being so fruitful They have here a sort of Herb or Plant called Ganga or Bang I never saw any but once and that was at some distance from me It appeared to me like Hemp and I thought it had been Hemp till I was told to the contrary It is reported of this Plant that if it is infused in any Liquor it will stupify the brains of any person that drinks thereof but it operates diversly according to the constitution of the person Some it makes sleepy some merry putting them into a Laughing fit and others it makes mad but after 2 or 3 hours they come to themselves again I never saw the effects of it on any person but have heard much discourse of it What other use this Plant may serve for I know not but I know it is much esteemed here and in other places too whither it is transported This Country abounds also with Medicinal Drugs and Herbs and with variety of Herbs for the Pot. The chief of their Drugs is Camphire of which there are quantities found on this Island but most of it either on the borders of this Kingdom to the Southward or more remote still without the precincts of it This that is found on the Island Sumatra is commonly sent to Japan to be refined and then brought from thence pure and transported whither the Merchants please afterwards I know that here are several sorts of Medicinal Herbs made use of by the Natives who go often a simpling seeming to understand their Virtues much and making great use of them but this being wholly out of my sphere I can give no account of them and tho here are plenty of Pot Herbs yet I know the names of none but Onions of which they have great abundance and of a very good sort but small There are many other very profitable Commodities on this Island but some of them are more peculiar to other parts of it than Achin especially Pepper All the Island abounds with that Spice except only this North West end at least so much of it as is comprehended within the Kingdom of Achin Whether this defect is through the negligence or laziness of these people I know not Gold also is found by report in many parts of this Island but the Kingdom of Achin is at present most plentifully stored with it Neither does any place in the East Indies that I know of yield such quantities of it as this Kingdom I have never been at Japan and therefore can make no estimate of the great riches of that Kingdom but here I am certain there is abundance of it The Land Animals of this Country are Deer Hogs Elephants Goats Bullocks Buffaloes Horses Porcupines Monkeys Squirrils Guanoes Lizards Snakes c. Here are also abundance of Ants of several sorts and Woodlice called by the English in the East Indies White Ants. The Elephants that I saw here were all tame yet 't is reported there are some wild but I judge not many if any at all In some places there are plenty of Hogs they are all wild and commonly very poor At some times of the year when the wild Fruits fall from the Trees they are indifferent fat or at least fleshy and then they are sweet and good they are very numerous and whether for that reason or scarcity of food it is very rare to find them fat The Goats are not very many neither are there many Bullocks but the Savannahs swarm with Buffaloes belonging to some or other of the Inhabitants who milk them and eat them but don 't work them so far as I saw The Horses of this Country are but small yet sprightly and sometimes they are transported hence to the Coast of Coromandel The Porcupines and Squirrels are accounted good food by the English but how they are esteemed by the Natives I know not The Fowls of this Country are Dunghil Fowls and Ducks but I know of no other tame Fowls they have In the Woods there are many sorts of wild Fowls viz. Maccaws Parrots Parakites Pigeons and Doves of 3 or 4 sorts There are plenty of other small Birds but I can say nothing of them The Rivers of this Country afford plenty of Fish The Sea also supplys divers sorts of very good Fish viz. Snooks Mullets Mudfish Eels Stingrays which I shall describe in the Bay of Campeachy Ten pounders Old Wives Cavallies Craw-fish Shrimps c. The Natives of this Country are Malayans They are much the same people with those of Queda Jihore and other places on the Continent of Malacca speaking the same Malayan Language with very little difference and they are of the same Mahometan Religion and alike in their haughty humour and manner of living so that they seem to have been originally the same people They are people of a middle stature straight and well shaped and of a dark Indian copper colour Their Hair is black and lank their Faces generally pretty
to these Moors are obliged to joyn Stock with them and they first make an offer of it to them as a kindness and the Moors being generally desirous to Trade frequently accept of it almost on any terms but should they be unwilling yet dare they not refuse for fear of disobliging the Danes who are Lords of the place In this Ship I found Mr Coppenger and he was the first that I had seen of all the Company that left me at the Nicobar Islands The next morning we filled our water and weigh'd again the Dane being gone a little before He was bound to Jihore to load Pepper but intended to touch at Malacca as most Ships do that pass these Streights He also sailed better than we and therefore left us to follow him We stood on yet nearest to the Sumatra shore till we came in sight of Pulo Arii in Lat 3 d 2 m. N. These are several Islands lying S. E. by E. l Easterly from Pulo Verero about 32 leagues distant These Islands are good marks for Ships bound thro the Streights for when they bear S. E. at 3 or 4 leagues distance you may steer away E. by S. for the Malacca Shore from whence you then may be about 20 leagues The first Land you will see is Pulo Parselore which is a high peeked Hill in the Country on the Malacca Coast which standing by it self amidst a low Country it appears like an Island tho I know not whether it is is really one for it stands some miles within the shoar of the Continent of Malacca It is a very remarkable Hill and the only Sea mark for Seamen to guide themselves through certain Sands that lye near the Main and if it is thick hazy Weather and the hill is obscur'd Pilots unless they are very knowing in the Soundings will hardly venture in for the Channel is not above a league wide and there are large shoals on each side These shoals lye ten leagues from Pulo Arii and continue till within 2 or 3 of the Malacca shoar In the Channel there is 12 or 14 fathom water but you may keep in 7 or 8 fathom on either side and sounding all the way you may pass on without danger We had a good gale at West which brought us in sight of Pulo Parsalore and so we kept sounding till we came within the shoar and then we had the Town of Malacca about 18 leagues distant from us to the S. E. and by E. Being shot over to the Malacca shore there is good wide Channel to sail in you having the shoals on one side and the Land on the other to which last you may come as nigh as you see convenient for there is water enough and good anchoring The Tide runs pretty strong here the Flood sets to the Eastward and the Ebb to the West and therefore when there is little wind and Ships cannot stem the Tide they commonly anchor But we being in with the Malacca shoar had a westerly Wind which brought us before Malacca Town about the middle of October and here I first heard that King William and Queen Mary were Crowned King and Queen of England The Dane that left us at Pulo Verero was not yet arrived for as we afterwards understood they could not find the way through the Sands but were forc'd to keep along without them and fetch a great Compass about which retarded their Passage Malacca is a pretty large Town of about 2 or 300 Families of Dutch and Portuguese many of which are a mixt breed between those Nations There are also many of the Native Malayans inhabiting in small Cottages on the skirts of the Town The Dutch Houses are built with Stone and the Streets are wide and straight but not paved At the N. West of the Town there is a Wall and Gate to pass in and out and a small Fort always guarded with Soldiers The Town stands on a level low ground close by the Sea The Land on the backside of the Town seems to be morassy and on the West side without the Wall there are Gardens of Fruits and Herbs and some fair Dutch Houses but that quarter is chiefly the habitation of the Malayans On the East side of the Town there is a small River which at a Spring Tide will admit small Barks to enter About 100 paces from the Sea there is a Draw bridge which leads from the midst of the Town to a strong Fort built on the East side of the River This is the chief Fort and is built on a low level ground close by the Sea at the foot of a little steep Hill Its form is semicircular according to the natural position of the adjacent Hill It fronts chiefly to the Sea and having its foundation on firm Rocks the Walls are carried up to a good heighth and of a considerable thickness The lower part of is washed by the Sea every Tide On the back of the Hill the Land being naturally low there is a very large Moat cut from the Sea to the River which makes the whole an Island and that back part is stockadoed round with great Trees set up an end so that there is no entring when once the Draw-bridge is haled up On the Hill within the Fort stands a small Church big enough to receive all Towns people who come hither on Sundays to hear Divine service and on the Main beyond the Fort the Malayans are also seated close by the Sea The first Europeans who settled here were the Portuguese They also built the great Fort but whether they moted round the Hill and made an Island of that spot of ground I know not nor what charges have been bestowed on it since to make it defenceable nor what other alterations have been made but the whole building seems to be pretty antient and that part of it which fronts to the Sea was in all probability built by the Portuguese for there are still the marks of the Conquerors shot in the Walls It is a place so naturally strong that I even wonder how they could be beaten out but when I consider what other places they then lost and their mismanagements I am the less surprized at it The Portuguese were the first discoverers by Sea of the East Indies and had thereby the Advantage of Trade with these 〈◊〉 Eastern people as also an opportunity thro their weakness to settle themselves where they pleased Therefore they made Settlements and Forts among them in divers places of India as here for one and presuming upon the strength of their Forts they insulted over the Natives and being grown rich with Trade they fell to all manner of looseness and debauchery the usual concomitant of Wealth and as commonly the fore runner of Ruin The Portuguese at this place by report made use of the Native Women at their pleasure whether Virgins or Married Women luch as they liked they took without controle and it is probable they as little restrained their lust in
Dutch was much infested by them These Indians as I have heard had formerly Plantations on most of the Caribbe Islands and in their Sea Voyages did use to remain 3 Weeks or a Month at a time on an Island and then remove to another and so visit most of them before their return to the main St. Vincent is another of these Islands lying near St. Lucia We passed between them and seeing a smoke on St. Lucia we sent our Boat ashore there Our Men found some of the Caribee-Indians and bought of them Plantains Bonanos Pine Apples and Sugar Canes and returning aboard again there came with them a Canoa with 3 or 4 of the Indians These often repeated the word Captain Warner and seemed to be in some disquiet about him We did not then understand the meaning of it but since I have been informed that this Captain Warner whom they mentioned was born at Antego one of our English Islands and the Son of Governour Warner by an Indian Woman and bred up by his Father after the English manner he learned the Indian Language also of his Mother but being grown up and finding himself despised by his English Kindred he forsook his Fathers House got away to St. Lucia and there lived among the Caribbe Indians his Relations by the Mother side Where conforming himself to their Customs he became one of their Captains and roved from one Island to another as they did About this time the Caribbees had done some spoil on our English Plantations at Antego and therefore Governour Warner's Son by his Wife took a Party of Men and went to suppress those Indians and came to the place where his Brother the Indian Warner lived Great seeming Joy there was at their Meeting but how far it was real the Event shewed for the English Warner providing plenty of Liquor and inviting his half Brother to be merry with him in the midst of his Entertainment ordered his Men upon a signal given to murder him and all his Indians which was accordingly performed The Reason of this inhumane Action is diversly reported Some say that this Indian-Warner committed all the spoil that was done to the English and therefore for that Reason his Brother kill'd him and his Men. Others that he was a great Friend to the English and would not suffer his Men to hurt them but did all that lay in his power to draw them to an amicable Commerce and that his Brother kill'd him for that he was ashamed to be related to an Indian But be it how it will he was call'd in question for the Murder and forced to come home to take his Tryal in England Such perfidious Doings as these beside the Baseness of them are great hindrances of our gaining an Interest among the Indians Putting from these Islands we steered away further West and falling in with the East end of Hispaniola we ranged down along on the South side even to Cape Tiburon which is the west-West-end of the Island There we lay by and sent our Boat ashore for Captain Kent had been informed that there were great Groves of Orange-Trees near this Cape But our Men not finding any he then concluded there were none But I have been since informed my self by several that have been there that there are enough of them thereabouts From hence we steered away for Jamaica where we arrived in a short time bringing with us the first News they had of the Peace with the Dutch Here according to my Contract I was immediately discharged and the next day I went to the Spanish Town call'd Sant ' Jago de la Vega where meeting with Mr. Whalley we went together to Coll. Hellier's Plantation in 16 Mile-walk In our way thither we past through Sir Tho. Muddiford's Plantation at the Angells where at that time were Otta and Cacao-Trees growing and fording a pretty large River we past by the side of it 2 or 3 Miles up the stream there being high Mountains on each side The way to 16 Mile-walk was formerly a great deal about round a large Mountain till Mr. Cary Helliar the Collonel's Brother found out this way For being desirous of making out a shorter cut he and some others coasted along the River till they found it run between a Rock that stood up perpendicularly steep on each side and with much difficulty they climbed over it But a Dog that belonged to them finding a hole to creep through the Rock suggested to them that there was a hollow Passage and he clear'd it by blowing up the Rock with Gunpowder till he had made a way through it broad enough for a Horse with a Pack and high enough for a Man to Ride through This is called the Hollow Rock Some other Places he levell'd and madeit an indifferent good Passage He was a very Ingenious Gentleman and doubtless had he lived might have propagated some advantagious Arts on that Island He was once endeavouring to make Salt Petre at the Angells but did not bring it to Perfection Whether the Earth there was not right I know not but probably there may be Salt-Petre-Earth in other Places especially about Passage-Fort where as I have been informed the Canes will not make good Sugar by Reason of the saltness of the Soil I liv'd with Mr. Whalley at 16 Mile-walk for almost six Months and then entred my self into the Service of one Captain Heming to manage his Plantation at St. Anns on the Northside of the Island and accordingly rode from St. Jago de la Vega toward St. Anns. This Road has but sorry Accommodations for Travellers The first Night I lay at a poor Hunters Hut at the foot of Mount Diabolo on the South side of it where for want of Cloaths to cover me in the Night I was very cold when the Land-wind sprang up This Mountain is part of the great Ridge that runs the length of the Island from East to West to the East 't is call'd the Blew Mountain which is higher than this The next Day crossing Mount Diabolo I got a hard Lodging at the Foot of it on the North side and the third day after arrived at Captain Heming's Plantation I was clearly out of my Element there and therefore as soon as Captain Heming came thither I disingaged my self from him and took my passage on Board a Sloop to Port-Royal with one Mr. Statham who used to Trade round the Island and touched there at that time From Port-Royal I sail'd with one Mr. Fishook who traded to the North-side of the Island and sometimes round it And by those coasting Voyages I came acquainted with all the Ports and Bays about Jamaica and with all their Manufactures as also with the Benefit of the Land and Sea-winds For our Business was to bring Goods to or carry them from Planters to Port-Royal and we were always entertained civilly by them both in their Houses and Plantations having Liberty to walk about and view them They gave us also Plantains
Yams Potatoes c. to carry aboard with us on which we fed commonly all our Voyage But after six or seven Months I left that employ also and shipt my self aboard one Capt. Hudsel who was bound to the Bay of Campeachy to load Logwood We sailed from Port-Royal about the beginning of August in 1675. in Company with Capt. Wren in a small Jamaica Bark and Capt. Johnson Commander of a Ketch belonging to New-England This Voyage is all the way before the Wind and therefore Ships commonly sail it in 12 or 14 Days Neither were we longer in our Passage for we had very fair Weather and touch'd no where till we came to Trist Island in the Bay of Campeachy which is the only place they go to In our way thither we first sailed by little Caimanes leaving it on our Larboard side and Key Monbrack which are two small Islands lying South of Cuba The next Land we saw was the Isle of Pines and steering still Westerly we made Cape Corienes And sailing on the South side of Cuba till we came to Cape Antonio which is the West end of it we stretched over towards the Peninsula of Jucatan and fell in with Cape Catoch which is in the Extream part of that Promontory towards the East The Land trends from this Cape one way South about 40 Leagues till you come to the Island Cozumel and from thence it runs S. W. down into the Bay of Honduras About 10 Leagues from Cape Catoch between it and Cozumel lies a small Island called by the Spaniards Key-Muger or Womens-Island because 't is reported that when they went first to settle in these parts they left their Wives there while they went over on the main to find some better Habitation Tho' now they have no settlement near it whatever they have had formerly About 3 Leagues from Cape Catoch and just against it is a small Island called Loggerhead-Key probably because it is frequently visited by a sort of Turtle so called near this Island we always find a great ripling which Seamen call the Rip-raps This Cape tho' it appears to be part of the Main yet is divided from it by a small Creek scarce wide enough for a Canoa to pass through though by it 't is made an Island This I have been credibly informed of by some who yet told me that they made a shift to pass it in a Canoa The Cape is very low Land by the Sea but somewhat higher as you go further from the shore It is all over-grown with Trees of divers sorts especially Logwood and therefore was formerly much frequented by the Jamaica Men who came thither in Sloops to load with it till all the Logwoodtrees near the Sea were cut down but now 't is wholly abandoned because the Carriage of it to the shore requires more labour than the cutting logging and chipping Besides they find better Wood now in the Bays of Campeachy and Honduras and have but little way to carry it not above 300 Paces when I was there whereas at Cape Catoch they were forc'd to carry it 1500 Paces before they left that Place From Cape Catoch we coasted along by the shore on the North side of Jucatan towards Cape Condecedo The Coast lies nearest West The distance between these two Capes is about 80 Leagues The shore lies pretty level without any visible Points or Bendings in the Land It is woody by the shore and full of sandy Bays and lofty Mangroves The first place of Note to the West of Cape Catoch is a small Hill by the Sea call'd the Mount and is distant from it about 14 Leagues It is very remarkable because there is no other High-Land on all this Coast. I was never ashore here but have met with some well acquainted with the Place who are all of opinion that this Mount was not natural but the Work of Men And indeed it is very probable this Place has been inhabited for here are a great many large Cisterns supposed to have been made for the receiving of Rain-water for there are no fresh Springs to be found here the Soil being all sandy and very salt So that as I have been credibly informed by an intelligent Person the Spaniards do fetch of it to make Salt-Petre He also told me that being once there in a Privateer and landing some Men on the Bay they found about 100 Packs of this Earth bound up in Palmeto-leaves and a Spanish Mulatto to guard it The Privateers at first sight of the Packs were in hopes there had been Maiz or Indian Corn in them which they then wanted but opening them they found nothing but Earth and examining the Mulatto for what use it was he said to make Powder and that he expected a Bark from Campeachy to fetch it away He further told me that tasting of it he found it very salt as all the Earth thereabouts was So that 't is not improbable that those Cisterns were made for the carrying on a Salt-Petre-Work But whatever was the design at first it is now wholly laid aside for there is no use made of them neither are there any Inhabitants near this Place Between the Mount and Cape Condecedo close by the Sea are many little Spots of Mangrove-trees which at a distance appear-like Islands but coming nearer when other lower Trees appear it shews like ragged and broken Ground but at last all the Land presents it self to your view very even The next Place of Note on this Coast is Rio de la Gartos almost in the Mid-way between Cape Catoch and Cape Condecedo This also is a very remarkable Place for here are 2 Groves of High Magnroves one on each side the River by which it may be known very well The River is but small yet deep enough for Canoas The Water is good and I know not any other Brook or fresh River on all the Coast from Cape Catoch till within 3 or 4 Leagues of Campeachy Town A little to the East of this River is a Fish-Range and a small Indian Hutt or two within the Woods where the Indian Fishers who are subject to the Spaniards lye in the Fishing-Seasons their Habitations and Familes being farther up in the Country Here are Poles to hang their Nets on and Barbecues to dry their Fish When they go off to Sea they fish with Hook and Line about 4 or 5 Leagues from the shore for Snappers and Gropers which I have already described in my Voyage round the VVorld Chap. 4. Pag. 91. Since the Privateers and Logwood-ships have sailed this way these Fisher-men are very shy having been often snap'd by them So that now when they are out at Sea if they see a Sail they presently sink their Canoas even with the edge of the Water for the Canoas when they are full of Water will sink no lower and they themselves lye just with their heads above Water till the Ship which they saw is pass'd by or comes Night I have seen them under
Islands lying in the Lat. of about 23 d. North and distant from the Coast of Jucatan about 25 Leagues the biggest is not above a Mile or two in Circuit They are distant from one another 2 or 3 Miles not lying in a Line but soattering here and there with good Channels of 20 or 30 Fathom Water for a Ship to pass between All of them have good Anchoring on the West sides where you may ride in what depths you please from 10 to 2 Fathom Water clean sandy Ground On some there are a few low Bushes of Burton-Wood but they are mostly Barren and Sandy bearing nothing but only a little Chicken-Weed neither have they any fresh Water Their Land-Animals are only large Rats which are in great Plenty and of Fowls Boobies in vast abundance with Men of War and Egg-Birds These inhabit only on some of the Northermost of them not promiscuously one among another but each sort within their own Precincts viz. the Boobies and the other two sorts each a-part by themselves and thus two or three of the Islands are wholly taken up The Boobies being most numerous have the greatest portion of Land The Egg-Birds tho' they are many yet being but small take up but little room to the rest Yet in that little part which they inhabit they are sole Masters and not disturbed by their Neighbours All three sorts are very tame especially the Boobies and so thick settled that a Man cannot pass through their Quarters without coming within reach of their Bills with which they continually peck't at us I took notice that they sate in Pairs and therefore at first thought them to be Cock and Hen but upon striking at them one flew away from each place and that which was left behind seemed as malicious as the other that was gone I admired at the boldness of those that did not fly away and used some sort of violence to force them but in vain for indeed these were young Ones and had not yet learned the use of their Wings tho' they were as big and as well feathered as their Dams only their Feathers were something whiter and fresher I took notice that an old one either the Cock or Hen always sat with the Young to secure them for otherwise these Fowls would prey on each other the Strong on the Weak at least those of a different Kind would make bold with their Neighbours The Men-of-War-Birds as well as the Boobies left Guardians to the Young when they went off to Sea lest they should be starved by their Neighbours for there were a great many old and lame Men of War Birds that could not fly off to Sea to seek their own Food These did not inhabit among their Consorts but were either expelled the Community or else chose to lye out at some distance from the rest and that not altogether but scattering here and there where they could rob securest I saw near 20 of them on one of the Islands which sometimes would sally into the Camp to seek for Booty but presently retreated again whether they got any thing or nothing If one of these lame Birds found a Young Booby not guarded it presently gave him a good poult on the back with his Bill to make him disgorge which they will do with one stroak and it may be cast up a Fish or two as big as a Mans Wrist this they swallow in a trice and march off and look out for another Prize The sound Men-of-War will sometimes serve the old Boobies so off at Sea I have seen a Man-of-War fly directly at a Booby and give it one blow which has caused it to cast up a large Fish and the Man of War flying directly down after it has taken it in the Air before it reach'd the Water There are abundance of Fish at some distance from these Islands by which the Fowls inhabiting here are daily supplied The Fish near the Island are Sharks Sword Fishes and Nurses all three sorts delighting to be near sandy Bays those that I saw here were but of a small size the Sword-Fish not above a Foot and a half or two Foot long neither were the Sharks much longer and the Nurses about the same length The Nurse is just like a Shark only its skin is rougher and is used for making the finest Rasps Here are many Seals they come up to sun themselves only on two or three of the Islands I don't know whether exactly of the same kind with those in colder Climates but as I have noted in my former Book they always live where there is plenty of Fish To the North of these Islands lyes a long ledge of Rocks bending like a Bow it seems to be 10 or 12 Yards wide and about 4 Leagues long and 3 Leagues distant from the Island They are above Water all joyning very close to one another except at one or two Places where are small Passages about nine or ten Yards Wide 't was through one of these that Providence directed us in the Night for the next Morning we saw the Riff about half a Mile to the North of us and right against us was a small Gap by which we came in hither but coming to view it more nearly with our Boat we did not dare to venture out that way again One Reason why we would have gone out to the Northward was because from our Main-top we saw the Islands to the Southward of us and being unacquainted knew not whether we might find among them a Channel to pass through our second reason was the hopes of making a better slant in for the shore if we could weather the East end of the Riff In order to this we weighed Anchor keeping down by the side of the Riff till we were at the West end of it which was about a League from where we Anchored then we stood off to the North and there kept plying off and on to Weather the East end of the Riff three Days but not being able to effect it by reason of a strong Current setting to the N. W. we ran back again to the West end of the Riff and steered away for the Islands There we Anchored and lay three or four days and visited most of them and found plenty of such Creatures as I have already described Though here was great store of such good Food and we like to want yet we did neither salt any nor spend of it fresh to save our Stock I found them all but one Man averse to it but I did heartily wish them of another mind because I dreaded wanting before the end of the Voyage a hazard which we needed not to run there being here such plenty of Fowls and Seals especially of the latter that the Spaniards do often come hither to make Oyl of their Fat upon which account it has been visited by English men from Jamaica particularly by Capt. Long who having the command of a small Bark came hither purposely to make Seal-Oyl and
Pines lyes on the South side towards the West end of Cuba and is distant from it 3 or 4 Leagues Cape Corientes on Cuba is five or six Leagues to the Westward of the Isle of Pines Between Pines and Cuba are many small woody Islands scattered here and there with Channels for Ships to pass between and by report there is good anchoring near any of them Jamaica Sloops do sometimes pass through between Cuba and Pines when they are bound to Wind-ward because there the Sea is always smooth They are also certain to meet good Land-winds besides they can Anchor when they please and thereby take the benefit of the Tides and when they are got past the East end of Pines they may either stand out to Sea again or if they are acquainted among the small Islands to the East of it which are called the South Keys of Cuba they may range amongst them to the Eastward still taking the greater benefit of Land-winds and Anchoring Besides if Provision is scarce they will meet Jamaica Turtlers or else may get Turtle themselves at which many of them are expert There is also plenty of Fish of many sorts but if they are not provided with Hooks Lines or Harpoons or any other Fishing-Craft nor meet with any Turtlers Cuba will afford them Sustenance of Hog or Beef The great Inconvenience of going in the inside of Pines between it and Cuba proceeds from a Spanish Garrison of about 40 Soldiers at Cape Corientes who have a large Periago well fitted with Oars and Sails and are ready to launch out and seize any small Vessel and seldom spare the Lives as well as the Goods of those that fall into their Hands for fear of telling Tales Such Villanies are frequently practised not only here but also in several other Places of the West Indies and that too with such as came to Trade with their Country-men The Merchants and Gentry indeed are no way guilty of such Actions only the Soldiers and Rascality of the People and these do commonly consist of Mulatoes or some other sort of Copper Colour Indians who are accounted very Barbarous and Cruel The Isle of Pines is about 11 or 12 Leagues long and 3 or 4 broad The West end of it is low Mangrovy Land and within which is a Lagune of about 3 or 4 Miles wide running to the Eastward but how far I know not with a small Creek of 2 or 3 Foot Water reaching to the Sea The Lagune it self is so shallow especially near the Island that you cannot bring a Canoa within 20 or 30 Paces of the shore The South side of the Island is low flat and rocky the Rocks are perpendicularly steep towards the Sea so that there is no Anchoring on that side but at the West end very good in sandy Ground The body of the Island is high Land with many little Hills incompassing a high Pike or Mountain standing in the middle The Trees that grow here are of divers sorts most of them unknown to me Red Mangroves grow in the low swampy Land against the Sea but on the firm hilly part Pine-Trees are most plentiful of these here are great Groves of a good height and bigness streight and large enough to make Topmasts or standing Masts for small Vessels at the West end there is a pretty big River of fresh Water but no coming at it near the Sea for red Mangroves which grow so thick on both sides of it that there is no getting in among them The Land-Animals are Bullocks Hogs Dear c. here are small Savannahs for the Bullocks and Deer to feed in as well as Fruit in the Woods for the Hogs Here are also a sort of Racoons or Indian Conies and in some Places plenty of Land-Turtle and Land-Crabs of two sorts white and black Both of them make holes in the Ground like Conies where they shelter themselves all day and in the Night come out to feed they will eat Grass Herbs or such Fruit as they find under the Trees The Manchaniel Fruit which neither Bird nor Beast will taste is greedily devoured by them without doing them any harm Yet these very Crabs that feed on Manchaneel are venomous both to Man and Beast that feeds on them though the others are very good Meat The white Crabs are the largest sort some of them are as big as a Mans two Fists joyned together they are shaped like Sea-Crabs having one large Claw wherewith they will pinch very hard neither will they let go their hold though you bruise them in pieces unless you break the Claw too but if they chance to catch your Fingers the way is to lay your Hand Crab and all flat on the Ground and he will immediately loose his hold and scamper away These white ones build in wet swampy dirty Ground near the Sea so that the Tide washes into their Holes but the black Crab is more cleanly delighting to live in dry Places and makes its House in sandy Earth Black Crabs are commonly fat and full of Eggs they are also accounted the better Meat tho' both sorts are very good Here are also a great many Alligators and Crocodiles that haunt about this Island and are said to be the most daring in all the West Indies I have heard of many of their Tricks as that they have followed a Canoa and put their Noses in over the Gunnal with their Jaws wide open as if ready to devour the Men in it And that when they have been ashore in the Night near the Sea the Crocodiles have boldly come in among them and made them run from their Fire and taken away their Meat from them Therefore when Privateers are hunting on this Island they always keep Sentinels out to watch for these ravenous Creatures as duly as they do in other Places for fear of Enemies especially in the Night for fear of being devoured in their sleep The Spaniards of Cuba have here some Craules i. e. Herds of Hogs with a few Indians or Mulatoes to look after them Here are also Hunters that gain a livelihood by killing wild Hog and Beef This Island is reported to be very wet I have heard many say that it rains here more or less every day in the Year but this I suppose is a mistake for there fell no Rain about us so long as we stayed here neither did I see any appearance of it in other Places of the Island We were no sooner at an Anchor but five of us went ashore leaving only the Cook and Cabbin-Boy aboard We had but two bad fowling Pieces in the Ship those we took with us with a design to Kill Beef and Hog We went into the Lagune where we found Water enough for our Canoa and in some Places not much to spare when we were got almost over it we saw 8 or 10 Bulls and Cows feeding on the shore close by the Sea This gave us great hopes of good success We therefore rowed away aside off the
dried them wear them in our Hats for a perfume The Flesh is seldom eaten but in case of Necessity because of its strong scent Now the Crocodile hath none of these Kernels neither doth his Flesh taste at all Musky therefore esteemed better Food He is of a yellow colour neither hath he such long Teeth in his under Jaw The Crocodile's Legs also are longer and when it runs on Land it bears its Tail above the Ground and turns up the tip of it in a round bow and the Knots on the back are much thicker higher and firmer than those of the Alligator And differ also as to the Places where they are found For in some Parts as here in the Bay of Campeachy are abundance of Alligators where yet I never saw nor heard of any Crocodiles At the Isle Grand Caymanes there are Crocodiles but no Alligators At Pines by Cuba there are abundance of Crocodiles but I cannot say there are no Alligators tho' I never saw any there Both Kinds are called Caymanes by the Spaniards therefore probably they may reckon them for the same And I know of no other difference for they both lay Eggs alike which are not distinguishable to the Eye They are as big as a Goose-Egg but much longer and good Meat yet the Alligators Eggs taste very musky They prey both alike in either Element for they love Flesh as well as Fish and will live in either fresh or salt Water Beside these Creatures I know none that can live any where or upon any sort of Food like them 'T is reported that they love Dogs Flesh better than any other Flesh whatsoever This I have seen with my own Eyes that our Dogs were so much afraid of them that they would not very willingly drink at any great River or Creek where those Creatures might lurk and hide themselves unless they were through Necessity constrained to it and then they would stand five or six Foot from the brink of the Creek or River and bark a considerable time before they would Adventure nearer and then even at the sight of their own Shadows in the Water they would again retire to the Place from whence they came and bark vehemently a long time so that in the dry Season when there was no fresh Water but in Ponds and Creeks we used to fetch it our selves and give it our Dogs and many times in our Hunting when we came to a large Creek that we were to pass through our Dogs would not follow us so that we often took them in our Arms and carried them over Besides the fore-mentioned difference between the Alligator and Crocodile the latter is accounted more fierce and daring than the Alligator Therefore when we go to the Isles of Pines or Grand Caymanes to hunt we are often molested by them especially in the Night But in the Bay of Campeachy where there are only Alligators I did never know any Mischief done by them except by accident Men run themselves into their Jaws I remember one Instance of this Nature which is as follows In the very height of the dry time seven or eight Men English and Irish went to a Place called Pies Pond on Beef-Island to hunt This Pond was never dry so that the Cattle drew hither in swarms but after two or three days hunting they were shy and would not come to the Pong till Night and then if an Army of Men had lain to oppose them they would not have been debarr'd of Water The Hunters knowing their Custom lay still all Day and in the Night visited this Pond and killed as many Beefs as they could This Trade they had driven a Week and made great profit At length an Irish-man going to the Pond in the Night stumbled over an Alligator that lay in the Path The Alligator seized him by the Knee at which the Man cries out Help help His Consorts not knowing what the matter was ran all away from their Huts supposing that he was fallen into the clutches of some Spaniards of whom they were afraid every dry Season But poor Daniel not finding any assistance waited till the Beast opened his Jaw to take better hold because it is usual for the Alligator to do so and then snatch'd away his Knee and slipt the But-end of his Gun in the room of it which the Alligator griped so hard that he pull'd it out of his Hand and so went away The Man being near a small Tree climb'd up out of his reach and then cryed out to his Consorts to come and assist him who being still within Call and watching to hear the Issue of the Alarum made haste to him with Fire-brands in their Hands and brought him away in their Arms to his Hut for he was in a deplorable condition and not able to stand on his Feet his Knee was so torn with the Alligators Teeth His Gun was found the next day ten or twelve Paces from the Place where he was seized with two large Holes made in the butt-But-end of it one on each side near an Inch deep for I saw the Gun afterwards This spoiled their sport for a time they being forc'd to carry the Man to the Island Trist where their Ships were which was six or seven Leagues distant This Irish-man went afterwards to New-England to be cured in a Ship belonging to Boston and nine or ten Months after returned to the Bay again being recovered of his wound but went limping ever after This was all the mischief that ever I heard was done in the Bay of Campeachy by the Creatures call'd Alligators CHAP. III. Logwood Mens way of Living Their Hunting for Beefs in Canoas Alligators The Author 's setling with Logwood-Men He is lost in Hunting Captain Hall and his Mens disaster The way of preserving Bullocks Hides Two hairy Worms growing in the Author 's Leg. Dangerous Leg-worms in the West Indies The Author strangely cured of one A violent Storm A Description of Beef-Island Its Fruits and Animals The Spaniards way of hocksing Cattle Their care of preserving their Cattle The wasteful destruction made of them by the English and French Privateers The Author 's narrow Escape from an Alligator THE Logwood-Cutters as I said before inhabit the Creeks of the East and West Lagunes in small Companies building their Huts close by the Creeks sides for the benefit of the Sea-Breezes as near the Logwood Groves as they can removing often to be near their Business Yet when they are settled in a good open Place they chuse rather to go half a Mile in their Canoas to Work than lose that convenience Tho' they build their Huts but slightly yet they take care to thatch them very well with Palm or Palmeto Leaves to prevent the Rains which are there very violent from soaking in For their Bedding they raise a Barbicue or wooden Frame 3 Foot and half above Ground on one side of the House and stick up four Stakes at each corner one to fasten their Pavillions out
and then Landing walk'd one Mile through the Woods before we came into the Savannah and marched about 2 Miles in it before we came up with any Game Here I gave my Companions the slip and wandred so far into the Woods that I lost my self neither could I find the way into the open Savannah but instead of that ran directly from it through small Spots of Savannahs and Skirts of Woods This was sometime in May and it was between ten a Clock and one when I began to find that I was as we call it 〈◊〉 suppose from the Spaniards Morooned or Lost and quite out of the Hearing of my Comrades Guns I was somewhat surprized at this but however 〈◊〉 knew I should find my way out as soon as the Suâ—… was a little lower So I sat down to rest my self resolving however to run no farther out of my way for the Sun being so near the Zenith I could not distinguish how to direct my Course Being wearâ—… and almost faint for want of Water I was forced to have recourse to the wild Pines and was by them supplied or else I must have perish'd with Thirst. About three a Clock I went due North aâ—… near as I could judge for the Savannah lay East and West and I was on the South side of it At Sun-set I got out into the clear open Savannah being about two Leagues wide in most Places but how long I know not It is well stored with Bullocks but by frequent Hunting they grow shy and remove farther up into the Country Here 〈◊〉 found my self four or five Mile to the West 〈◊〉 the Place where I stragled from my Companions I made homewards with all the speed I could but being overtaken by the Night I lay down on the Grass a good distance from the Woods for the benefit of the Wind to keep the Muskitoes from me but in vain for in less than an Hours time I was so persecuted that though I endeavoured to keep them off by Fanning my self with Boughs and shifting my Quarters 3 or 4 times yet still they haunted me so that I could get no sleep A Day break I got up and directed my Course to thâ—… Creek where we landed from which I was theâ—… about two Leagues I did not see one Beast of any sort whatever in all the way though the day before I saw several Young Calves that could not follow their Dams but even these were now gone away to my great Vexation and Disappointment for I was very hungry But about a Mile farther I spied ten or twelve Quams perching on the Boughs of a Cotton-Tree These were not shy therefore I got well enough under them and having a single Bullet but no Shot about me fired at one of them but miss'd it though I had before often kill'd them so Then I came up with and fired at 5 or 6 Turkies but with no better success So that I was forced to march forward still in the Savannah toward the Creek and when I came to the Path that led to it through the Woods I found to my great Joy a Hat stuck upon a Pole and when I came to the Creek I found another These were set up by my Consorts who were gone home in the Evening as Signals that they would come and fetch me Therefore I sat down and waited for them for although I had then not above three Leagues home by Water yet it would have been very difficult if not impossible for me to have got thither over Land by reason of those vast unpassable Thickets abounding every where along the Creeks side wherein I have known some puzzled for two or three days and have not advanced half a Mile though they laboured extreamly every day Neither was I disappointed of my hopes for within half an Hour after my arrival at the Creek my Consorts came bringing every Man his Bottle of Water and his Gun both to hunt for Game and to give me notice by Firing that I might hear them for I have known several Men lost in the like manner and never heard of afterwards Such an Accident befel one Captain Hall of New-England who came hither in a Boston Ship to take in Logwood and was fraighted by two Scotch-men and one Mr. W. Cane an Irish-man who designing to go with Goods from Jamaica to New-England for that reason when his Logwood was aboard tarried at Trist with the Ship and hunted once in 2 or three Days for Beef to lengthen out his Salt-Provision One Morning the Captain designing to Hunt took five of his Men with his Mate as also his Merchant Mr. Cane along with him They Landed at the East end of the Island which is low Mangrove-land the Savannah is a considerable distance from the Sea and therefore troublesom to get to it However unless they would row four or five Leagues farther they could not find a more convenient place beside they doubted not of Mr. Canes skill to conduct them After they had followed him a Mile or two into the Woods the Captain seeing him to make a Halt as being in some doubt to consider of the way told him in derision that he was but a sorry Woodsman and that he would swing him but twice round and he should not guess the way out again and saying no more to him went forwards and bid his Seamen follow him which they did accordingly Mr. Cane after he had recollected himself struck off another way and desired them to go with him But instead of that they were all for following the Captain In a short time Mr. Cane got out of the Woods into the Savannah and there kill'd a good fat Cow and quartering it made it fit for Carriage supposing the Captain and Crew would soon be with him But after waiting 3 or 4 hours and firing his Gun several times without hearing any Answer took up his Burden and returned towards the Sea-side and upon giving a Signal a Boat came and brought him aboard In the mean time the Captain and his Men after 4 or 5 Hours ranging the Woods began to grow fired then his Mate hastily trusting more to his own Judgment left him and the four Seamen and about four or five a Clock being almost spent with Thirst got out of the Woods to the Sea shore and as weak as he was fired his Gun for the Boat to fetch him which was immediately done When he came Aboard he gave an Account whereabout and in what a condition he left the Captain and his Men but it being then too late to seek him the next Morning very early Mr. Cane and two Seamen taking Directions from the Mate who was so fatigued that he could not stir where he had left the Captain went ashore and at length came within call of him and at last found him layd down in a Thicket having just sense to call out sometimes but not strength enough to stand so they were forced to carry him to the Sea-side
A New Voyage ROUND THE WORLD Describing particularly The Isthmus of America several Coasts and Islands in the West Indies the Isles of Cape Verd the Passage by Terra del Fuego the South Sea Coasts of Chili Peru and Mexico the Isle of Guam one of the Ladrones Mindanao and other Philippine and East-India Islands near Cambodia China Formosa Luconia Celebes c. New Holland Sumatra Nicobar Isles the Cape of Good Hope and Santa Hellena THEIR Soil Rivers Harbours Plants Fruits Animals and Inhabitants THEIR Customs Religion Government Trade c. By William Dampier Illustrated with Particular Maps and Draughts LONDON Printed for James Knapton at the Crown in St Paul s Church-yard M DC XCVII To the Right Honourable Charles Mountague Esq President of the Royal Society One of the Lords Commissioners of the Treasury c. SIR MAY it please you to Pardon the Boldness of a Stranger to your Person if upon the encouragement of Common Fame he presumes so much upon your Candor as to lay before you this Account of his Travels As the Scene of them is not only Remote but for the most part little frequented also so there may be some things in them New even to you and some possibly not altogether unuseful to the Publick And that just Veneration which the World pays as to your Genera Worth so especially to that Zeal for the advancement of Knowledge and the Interest of your Country which you express upon all Occasions give you a particular Right to whatever may any way tend to the promoting these Interests as an Offering due to your Merit I have not so much of the vanity of a Traveller as to be fond of telling stories especially of this kind nor can I think this plain piece of mine deserves a place among your more Curious Collections much less have I the Arrogance to use your Name by way of Patronage for the too obvious faults both of the Author and the Work Yet dare I avow according to my narrow sphere and poor abilities a hearty Zeal for the promoting of useful knowledge and of any thing that may never so remotely tend to my Countries advantage And I must own an Ambition of transmitting to the Publick through your hands these Essays I have made toward those great ends of which you are so deservedly esteemed the Patron This hath been my design in this Publication being desirous to bring in my Gleanings here and there in Remote Regions to that general Magazine of the knowledge of Foreign Parts whieh the Royal Society thought you most worthy the Custody of when they chose you for their President and if in perusing these Papers your Goodness shall so far distinguish the Experience of the Author from his Faults as to judge him capable of serving his Country either immediately or by serving you he will endeavour by some real proofs to shew himself SIR Your Most Faithful Devoted Humble Servant W. Dampier THE PREFACE BEfore the Reader proceed any further in the perusal of this Work I must bespeak a little of his Patience here to take along with him this short account of it It is composed of a mixt Relation of Places and Actions in the same order of time in which they occurred for which end I kept a Journal of every days Observations In the Description of Places their Produce c. I have endeavoured to give what satisfaction I could to my Country-men tho possibly to the Describing several things that may have been much better accounted for by others Choosing to be more particular than might be needful with respect to the intelligent Reader rather than to omit what I thought might tend to the Information of Persons no less sensible and inquisitive tho not so Learned or Experienced For which reason my chief Care hath been to be as particular as was consistent with my intended brevity in setting down such Observables as I met with Nor have I given my self any great trouble since my Return to compare my Discoveries with those of others The rather because should it so happen that I have described some places or things which others have done before me yet in different Accounts even of the same things it can hardly be but there will be some new Light afforded by each of them But after all considering that the main of this Voyage hath its Scene-laid in long Tracts of the Remoter parts both of the East and West Indies some of which very seldom visited by English men and others as rarely by any Europeans I may without vanity incourage the Reader to expect many things wholly new to him and many others more fully described than he may have seen elsewhere for which not only this Voyage tho it self of many years continuance but also several former long and distant Voyages have qualified me As for the Actions of the Company among whom I made the greatest part of this Voyage a Thread of which I have carried on thro it 't is not to divert the Reader with them that I mention them much less that I take any pleasure in relating them but for methods sake and for the Readers satisfaction who could not so well acquiesce in my Description of Places c. without knowing the particular Traverses I made among them nor in these without an Account of the Concomitant Circumstances Besides that I would not prejudice the truth and sincerity of my Relation tho by omissions only And as for the Traverses themselves they make for the Readers advantage how little soever for mine since thereby I have been the better inabled to gratify his Curiosity as one who rambles about a Country can give usually a better account of it than a Carrier who jogs on to his Inn without ever going out of his Road. As to my Stile it cannot be expected that a Seaman should affect Politeness for were I able to do it yet I think I should be little sollicitous about it in a work of this Nature I have frequently indeed divested my self of Sea Phrases to gratify the Land Reader for which the Seamen will hardly forgive me And yet possibly I shall not seem Complaisant enough to the other because I still retain the use of so many Sea-terms I confess I have not been at all scrupulous in this matter either as to the one or the other of these for I am perswaded that if what I say be intelligible it matters not greatly in what words it is express'd For the same reason I have not been curious as to the spelling of the Names of Places Plants Fruits Animals c. which in many of these remoter parts are given at the pleasure of Travellers and vary according to their different Humours Neither have I confined my self to such Names as are given by Learned Authors or so much as enquired after many of them I write for my Countrymen and have therefore for the most part used such Names as are familiar to our English Seamen
Land I have seen of them also at Mindanea one of the Philippine Islands and on the Coast of New-Holland This Creature is about the bigness of a Horse and 10 or 12 foot long The mouth of it is much like the mouth of a Cow having great thick lips The Eyes are no bigger than a small Pea the Ears are only two small holes on each side of the Head The Neck is short and thick bigger than the Head The biggest part of this Creature is at the Shoulders where it hath two large Fins one on each side of its Belly Under each of these Fins the Female hath a small Dug to suckle her young From the Shoulders towards the Tail it retains its bigness for about 2 foot then groweth smaller and smaller to the very tail which is flat and about 14 inches broad and 20 inches long and in the middle 4 or 5 inches thick but about the edges of it not above 2 inches thick From the head to the tail it is round and smooth without any Fin but those two before mentioned I have heard that some have weighed above 1200 l. but I never saw any so large The Manatee delights to live in brackish Water and they are commonly in Creeks and Rivers near the Sea 'T is for this reason possibly they are not seen in the South Seas that ever I could observe where the Coast is generally a bold Shore that is high Land and deep Water close home by it with a high Sea or great Surges except in the Bay of Panama yet even there is no Manatee Whereas the West-Indies being as it were one great Bay composed of many smaller are mostly low Land and shoal Water and afford proper pasture as I may say for the Manatee Sometimes we find them in salt Water sometimes in fresh but never far at Sea And those that live in the Sea at such places where there is no River nor Creek fit for them to enter yet do commonly come once or twice in 24 hours to the mouth of any fresh Water River that is near their place of abode They live on Grass 7 or 8 inches long and of a narrow blade which grows in the Sea in many places especially among Islands near the Main This Grass groweth likewise in Creeks or in great Rivers near the sides of them in such places where there is but little tide or current They never come ashore nor into shallower water than where they can swim Their flesh is white both the fat and the lean and extraordinary sweet wholsome meat The tail of a young Cow is most esteemed but if old both head and tail are very tough A Calf that sucks is the most delicate meat Privateers commonly roast them as they do also great pieces cut out of the Bellies of the old ones The Skin of the Manatee is of great use to Privateers for they cut them out into straps which they make fast on the sides of their Canoas through which they put their Oars in rowing instead of tholes or pegs The Skin of the Bull or of the back of the Cow is too thick for this use but of it they make Horse-whips cutting them 2 or 3 foot long at the handle they leave the full substance of the Skin and from thence cut it away tapering but very even and square all the four sides While the Thongs are green they twist them and hang them to dry which in a weeks time become as hard as Wood. The Moskito-men have always a small Canoa for their use to strike Fish Tortoise or Manatee which they keep usually to themselves and very neat and clean They use no Oars but Paddles the broad part of which doth not go tapering towards the staff pole or handle of it as in the Oar nor do they use it in the same manner by laying it on the side of the Vessel but hold it perpendicularly griping the staff hard with both hands and putting back the water by main strength and very qâ—…ick strokes One of the Moskitoes for there go but two in a Canoa sits in the stern the other kneels down in the head and both paddle till they come to the place where they expect their game Then they lye still or paddle very softly looking well about them and he that is in the head of the Canoa lays down his paddle and stands up with his striking staff in his hand This staff is about 8 foot long almost as big as a mans Arm at the great end in which there is a hole to place his Harpoon in At the other end of his staff there is a piece of light Wood called Bobwood with a hole in it through which the small end of the staff comes and on this piece of Bobwood there is a line of 10 or 12 fathom wound neatly about and the end of the line made fast to it The other end of the line is made fast to the Harpoon which is at the great end of the staff and the Moskito man keeps about a fathom of it loose in his hand When he strikes the Harpoon presently comes out of the staff and as the Manatee swims away the line runs off from the bob and although at first both staff and bob may be carried under water vet as the line runs off it will rise again Then the Moskito men paddle with all their might to get hold of the bob again and spend usually a quarter of an hour before they get it When the Manatee begins to be tired it lyeth still and then the Moskito men paddle to the bob and take it up and begin to hale in the line When the Manatee feels them he swims away again with the Canoa after him then he that steers must be nimble to turn the head of the Canoa that way that his consort points who being in the head of the Canoa and holding the line both sees and feels which way the Manatee is swimming Thus the Canoa is towed with a violent motion till the Manatee's strength decays Then they gather in the line which they are often forced to let all go to the very end At length when the Creatures strength is spent they hale it up to the Canoas side and knock it on the head and tow it to the nearest shore where they make it fast and seek for another which having taken they go ashore with it to put it into their Canoa For it is so heavy that they cannot lift it in but they hale it up in shoal water as near the shore as they can and then overset the Canoa laying one side close to the Manatee Then they roll it in which brings the Canoa upright again and when they have heav'd out the water they fasten a line to the other Manatee that lieth afloat and tow it after them I have known two Moskito men for a week every day bring aboard two Manatee in this manner the least of which hath not weighed less than 600
pound and that in a very small Canoa that 3 English men would scarce adventure to go in When they strike a Cow that hath a young one they seldom miss the Calf for she commonly takes her young under one of her Fins But if the Calf is so big that she cannot carry it or so frightned that she only minds to save her own life yet the young never leaves her till the Moskito men have an opportunity to strike her They make their Lines both for Fishing and Striking with the bark of Maho which is a sort of Tree or Shrub that grow plentifully all over the West-Indies and whose Bark is made up of strings or threads very strong You may draw it off either in flakes or small threads as you have occasion T is fit for any manner of Cordage and Privateers often make their Rigging of it So much by way of Digression When we had cleaned our Tartan we sailed from hence bound for Boca-toro which is an opening between two Islands about 10 Deg. 10 Min. North Lat. between the Rivers of Veragne and Chagre Here we met with Captain Yanky who told us that there had been a Fleet of Spanish Armadilloes to seek us that Captain Tristian having fallen to Leeward was coming to Boca-toro and fell in amongst them supposing them to be our Fleet that they fired and chaced him but he Rowed and Towed and they supposed he got away that Captain Pain was likewise chaced by them and Captain Williams and that they had not seen them since that they lay within the Islands that the Spaniards never came in to him and that Captain Coxon was in at the Careening place This Boca-toro is a place that the Privateers use to resort to as much as any place on all the Coast because here is plenty of green Tortoise and a good Careening place The Indians here have no commerce with the Spaniards but are very barbarous and will not be dealt with They have destroyed many Privateers as they did not long after this some of Captain Pain s men who having built a Tent ashore to put his goods in while he Careened his Ship and some men lying there with their arms in the night the Indians crept softly into the Tent and cut off the Heads of or 4 men and made their escape nor was this the first time they had served the Privateers so There grow on this Coast Vinelloes in great quantity with which Chocolate is perfumed These I shall describe elsewhere Our Fleet being thus scattered there were now no hopes of getting together again therefore every one did what they thought most conducing to obtain their ends Captain Wright with whom I now was was resolv'd to cruise on the Coast of Cartagene and it being now almost the Westerly wind season we sailed from hence and Captain Yanky with us and we consorted because Captain Yanky had no Commission and was afraid the French would take away his Bark We past by Scuda a small Island where 't is said Sir Francis Drake's bowels were bury d and came to a small River to Westward of Chagre where we took two new Canoas and carry d them with us into the Sambaloes We had the Wind at West with much rain which brought us to Point-Samballas Here Captain Wright and Captain Yanky left us in the Tartane to fix the Canoas while they went on the Coast of Cartagene to seek for provision We cruised in among the Islands and kept our Moskito-men or strikers out who brought aboard some half-grown Tortoise and some of us went ashore every day to hunt for what we could find in the Woods Sometimes we got Pecary Warree or Deer at other times we light on a drove of large fat Monkeys or Quames Corrosoes each a large sort of Fowl Pidgeons Parrots or Turtle-doves We liv'd very well on what we got not staying long in one place but sometimes we would go on the Islands where there grow great Groves of Sapadillies which is a sort of Fruit much like a Pear but more juicy and under those Trees we found plenty of Soldiers a little kind of Animals that live in Shells and have two great Claws like a Crab and are good food One time our men found a great many large ones and being sharp-set had them drest but most of them were very sick afterwards being poysoned by them For on this Island were many Manchaneel Trees whose Fruit is like a small Crab and smells very well but they are not wholesome and we commonly take care of meddling with any Animals that eat them And this we take for a general rule when we find any Fruits that we have not seen before if we see them peck d by Birds we may freely eat but if we see no such sign we let them alone for of this fruit no Birds will taste Many of these Islands have of these Manchaneel-Trees growing on them Thus cruising in among these Islands at length we came again to La Sound 's Key and the day before having met with a Jamaica Sloop that was come over on the Coast to trade she went with us It was in the evening when we came to an Anchor and the next morning we fir'd two Guns for the Indians that liv'd on the Main to come aboard for by this time we concluded we should hear from our five men that we left in the heart of the Country among the Indians this being about the latter end of August and it was the beginning of May when we parted from them According to our expectation the Indians came aboard and brought our friends with them Mr. Wafer wore a Clout about him and was painted like an Indian and he was some time aboard before I knew him One of them named Richard Cobson dyed within 3 or 4 days after and was buryd on La Sounds Key After this we went to other Keys to the East-ward of these to meet Captain Wright and Captain Yanky who met with a Fleet of Pereagoes laden with Indian Corn Hog and Fowls going to Cartagene being convoyed by a small Armadilly of 2 Guns and 6 Patereroes Her they chaced ashore and most of the Pereagoes but they got two of them off and brought them away Here Captain Wright's and Captain Yanky's Barks were clean'd and we stock'd our selves with Corn and then went towards the Coast of Cartagene In our way thither we passed by the River of Darien which is very broad at the mouth but not above 6 foot water on a Spring tyde for the Tyde riseth but little here Captain Coxon about 6 months before we came out of the South Seas went up this River with a party of men Every man carry'd a small strong Bag to put his Gold in expecting great Riches there tho they got little or none They rowed up about 100 leagues before they came to any settlement and then found some Spaniards who lived there to truck with the Indians for Gold there being Gold Scales in
every house The Spaniards admired how they came so far from the mouth of the River because there are a sort of Indians living between that place and the Sea who are very dreadful to the Spaniards and will not have any commerce with them nor with any white people They use Trunks about 8 foot long out of which they blow poysoned Darts and are so silent in their attacks on their Enemies and retreat so nimbly again that the Spaniards can never find them Their Darts are made of Macaw-wood being about the bigness and length of a Knitting-needle one end is wound about with Cotton the other end is extraordinary sharp and small and is jagged with notches like a Harpoon So that whatever it strikes into it immediately breaks off by the weight of the biggest end which it is not of strength to bear it being made so slender for that purpose and is very difficult to be got out again by reason of those notches These Indians have always War with our Darien friendly Indians and live on both sides this great River 50 or 60 leagues from the Sea but not near the mouth of the River There are abundance of Manatee in this River and some Creeks belonging to it This relation I had from several men who accompany'd Captain Coxon in that discovery and from Mr. Cook in particular who was with them and is a very intelligent person He is now chief Mate of a Ship bound to Guinea To return therefore to the prosecution of our Voyage meeting with nothing of note we passed by Cartagene which is a City so well known that I shall say nothing of it We sailed by in sight of it for it lies open to the Sea and had a fair view of Madre de Popa or Nuestra Sennora de Popa a Monastery of the Virgin Mary's standing on the top of a very steep hill just behind Cartagene It is a place of incredible wealth by reason of the offerings made here continually and for this reason often in danger of being visited by the Privateers did not the neighbourhood of Cartagene keep them in awe 'T is in short the very Loretto of the West Indies it hath innumerable Miracles related of it Any misfortune that befalls the Privateers is attributed to this Lady s doing and the Spaniards report that she was abroad that night the Oxford Man of War was blown up at the Isle of Vacca near Hispaniola and that she came home all wet as belike she often returns with her Cloaths dirty and torn with passing thro Woods and bad ways when she has been out upon any expedition deserving doubtless a new suit for such eminent pieces of service From hence we passed on to the Rio Grande where we took up fresh Water at Sea a league off the mouth of that River From thence we sailed East-ward passing by St. Martha a large Town and good harbour belonging to the Spaniards yet hath it within these few years been twice taken by the Privateers It stands close upon the Sea and the Hill within land is a very large one towering up a great heighth from a vast body of Land I am of opinion that it is higher than the Pike of Tenariff others also that have seen both think the same tho its bigness makes its heighth less sensible I have seen it in passing by 30 leagues off at Sea others as they told me above 60 and several have told me that they have seen at once Jamaica Hispaniola and the high Land of Santa Martha and yet the nearest of these two places is distant from it 120 leagues and Jamaica which is farthest off is accounted near 150 leagues and I question whether any Land on either of those two Islands may be seen 50 leagues It 's head is generally hid in the Clouds but in clear wheather when the top appears it looks white supposed to be covered with Snow St. Martha lieth in the Lat. of 12 Deg. North. Being advanced 5 or 6 leagues to the Eastward of Santa Martha we left our Ships at Anchor and return'd back in our Canoa's to the River Grande entring it by a mouth of it that disembogues it self near Santa Martha purposing to attempt some Towns that lye a pretty way up that River But this design meeting with discouragements we return'd to our Ships and set sail to Rio la Hacha This hath been a strong Spanish Town and is well built but being often taken by the Privateers the Spaniards deserted it some time before our arrival It lieth to the Westward of a River and right against the Town is a good Road for Ships the bottom clean and sandy The Jamaica Sloops used often to come over to trade here and I am inform'd that the Spaniards have again settled themselves in it and made it very strong We enter'd the Fort and brought two small Guns aboard From thence we went to the Rancho-Reys one or two small Indian Villages where the Spaniards keep two Barks to fish for Pearl The Pearl-banks lye about 4 or 5 leagues off from the shore as I have been told thither the Fishing-Barks go and anchor then the Divers go down to the bottom and fill a Basket which is let down before with Oysters and when they come up others go down two at a time this they do till the Bark is full and then go ashore where the old men women and children of the Indians open the Oysters there being a Spanish Overseer to look after the Pearl Yet these Indians do very often secure the best Pearl for themselves as many Jamaica men can testifie who daily trade with them The meat they string up and hang it a drying At this place we went ashore where we found one of the Barks and saw great heaps of Oyster-shells but the people all fled Yet in another place between this and Rio La Recha we took some of the Indians who seem to be a stubborn sort of people They are long-visaged black hair their noses somewhat rising in the middle and of a stern look The Spaniards report them to be a very numerous Nation and that they will not subject themselves to their yoak Yet they have Spanish Priests among them and by trading have brought them to be somewhat sociable but cannot keep a severe hand over them The Land is but barren it being of a light sand near the Sea and most Savanah or Champian and the grass but thin and course yet they feed plenty of Cattle Every man knoweth his own and looketh after them but the Land is in common except only their Houses or small Plantations where they live which every man maintains with some sence about it They may remove from one place to another as they please no man having right to any Land but what he possesseth This part of the Country is not so subject to Rain as to the West-ward of Santa Martha yet here are Tornadoes or Thunder-showers but neither so violent as on the
Coast of Portabell nor so frequent The Westerly winds in the Westerly wind season blow here tho not so strong nor lasting as on the Coasts of Cartagene and Portabell When we had spent some time here we return'd again towards the Coast of Cartagene and being between Rio Grande and that place we met with Westerly winds which kept us still to the Eastward of Cartagene 3 or 4 days and then in the morning we descryed a Sail off at Sea and we chaced her at noon Captain Wright who sailed best came up with her and engaged her and in half an hour after Captain Yanky who sailed better than the Tartan the Vessel that I was in came up with her likewise and laid her aboard then Captain Wright also and they took her before we came up They lost 2 or 3 men and had 7 or 8 wounded The Prize was a Ship of 12 Guns and 40 men who had all good small Arms She was laden with Sugar and Tobacco and had 8 or 10 Tuns of Marmalett on board She came from Saint Jago on Cuba and was bound to Cartagene We went back with her to Rio Grande to fix our Rigging which was shattered in the Fight and to consider what to do with her for these were commodities of little use to us and not worth going into a Port with At the Rio Grande Captain Wright demanded the Prize as his due by virtue of his Commission Captain Yanky said it was his due by the Law of Privateers Indeed Captain Wright had the most right to her having by his Commission protected Captain Yanky from the French who would have turned him out because he had no Commission and he likewise began to engage her first But the Company were all afraid that Captain Wright would presently carry her into a Port therefore most of Captain Wright's Men stuck to Captain Yanky and Captain Wright losing his Prize burned his own Bark and had Captain Yankys's it being bigger than his own the Tartan was sold to a Jamaica Trader and Captain Yanky commanded the Prize Ship We went again from hence to Rio la Hach and set the Prisoners ashore and it being now the beginning of November we concluded to go to Querisao to sell our Sugar if favoured by westerly Winds which were now come in We sailed from thence having fair weather and Winds to our mind which brought us to Querisao a Dutch Island Captain Wright went ashore to the Governour and offered him the Sale of the Sugar but the Governor told him he had a great Trade with the Spaniards therefore he could not admit us in there but if we would go to St. Thomas which is an Island and Free Port belonging to the Danes and a Sanctuary for Privateers he would send a Sloop with such Goods as we wanted and Money to buy the Sugar which he would take at a certain rate but it was not agreed to Querisao is the only Island of importance that the Dutch have in the West-Indies It is about 5 leagues in length and may be 9 or 10 in circumference the Northernmost point is laid down in North lat 12 d. 40 m. and it is about 7 or 8 leagues from the Main near Cape Roman On the South side of the East end is a good harbour called Santa Barbara but the chiefest harbour is about 3 leagues from the S. E. end on the South side of it where the Dutch have a very good Town and a very strong Fort. Ships bound in thither must be sure to keep close to the Harbour's mouth and have a Hasar or Rope ready to send one end ashore to the Fort for there is no Anchoring at the entrance of the Harbour and the Current always sets to the Westward But being got in it is a very secure Port for Ships either to Careen or lye safe At the East end are two hills one of them is much higher than the other and steepest toward the North side The rest of the Island is indifferent level where of late some rich Men have made Sugar works which formerly was all pasture for Cattle there are also some small Plantations of Potatoes and Yames and they have still a great many Cattle on the Island but it is not so much esteemed for its produce as for its situation for the Trade with the Spaniard Formerly the Harbour was never without Ships from Cartagenâ—… and Portabell that did use to buy of the Dutch here 1000 or 1500 Negroes at once besides great quantities of European Commodities but of late that Trade is fallen into the hands of the English at Jamaica yet still the Dutch have a vast Trade over all the West Indies sending from Holland Ships of good force laden with European goods whereby they make very profitable returns The Dutch have two other Islands here but of little moment in comparison of Querisao the one lieth 7 or 8 leagues to the Westward of Querisao called Aruba the other 9 or 10 leagues to the Eastward of it called Bon-Airy From these Islands the Dutch fetch in Sloops Provision for Querisao to maintain their Garrison and Negroes I was never at Aruba therefore cannot say any thing of it as to my own knowledge but by report it is much like Bon-Airy which I shall describe only not so big Between Querisao and Bon-Airy is a small Island called Little Querisao it is not above a league from Great Querisao The King of France has long had an eye on Querisao and made some attempts to take it but never yet succeeded I have heard that about 23 or 24 years since the Governour had sold it to the French but dy'd a small time before the Fleet came to demand it and by his death that design fail d. Afterwards in the year 1678 the Count D Estre who a year before had taken the Isle of Tobago from the Dutch was sent hither also with a Squadron of stout Ships very well mann'd and fitted with Bombs and Carcasses intending to take it by storm This Fleet first came to Martinico where while they stay'd orders were sent to Petit-Guavers for all Privateers to repair thither and assist the Count in his design There were but two Privateers Ships that went thither to him which were mann'd partly with French partly with English men These set out with the Count but in their way to Querisao the whole Fleet was lost on a Riff or Ridge of Rocks that runs off from the Isle of Aves not above two Ships escaping one of which was one of the Privateers and so that design perished Wherefore not driving a bargain for our Sugar with the Governour of Querisao we went from thence to Bon-Airy another Dutch Island where we met a Dutch Sloop come from Europe laden with Irish Beef which we bought in exchange for some of our Sugar Bon-Airy is the Eastermost of the Dutch Islands and is the largest of the three tho not the most considerable The middle of the Island is laid
Accounts is now nothing but a Name For I have lain ashore in the place where that City stood but it is all overgrown with Wood so as to leave no sign that any Town hath been there We staid at the Isle of Blanco not above 10 days and then went back to Salt-Tortuga again where Captain Yanky parted with us and from thence after about 4 days all which time our men were drunk and quarrelling we in Captain Wright's Ship went to the Coast of Caraccos on the Main Land This Coast is upon several accounts very remarkable 'T is a continu'd tract of high Ridges of Hills and small Valleys intermix'd for about â—…o leagues stretching East and West but in such manner that the Ridges of Hills and the Valleys alternately run pointing upon the shore from South to North the Valleys some of them about 4 or 5 others not above 1 or 2 furlongs wide and in length from the Sea scarce any of them above 3 or 4 mile at most there being a long Ridge of Mountains at that distance from the Sea-Coast and in a manner parallel to it that joins those shorter Ridges and closeth up the South end of the Valleys which at the North ends of them lye open to the Sea and make so many little Sandy Bays that are the only Landing-places on all the Coast. Both the main Ridge and these shorter Ribs are very high Land so that 3 or 4 leagues off at Sea the Valleys scarce appear to the Eye but all looks like one great Mountain From the Isles of Roda's about 15 and from the Isle of Aves about 20 leagues off we see this Coast very plain from on board our Ships yet when at Anchor on this Coast we cannot see those Isles tho again from the tops of these Hills they appear as if at no great distance like so many Hillocks in a Pond These Hills are barren except the lower sides of them that are cover'd with some of the same rich black Mould that fills the Valleys and is as good as I have seen In some of the Valleys there is a strong red Clay but in the general they are extremely fertil well watered and inhabited by Spaniards and their Negro's They have Maiz and Plantains for their support with Indian Fowls and some Hogs But the main product of these Valleys and indeed the only Commodity it vends are the Cacao-Nuts of which the Chocolate is made The Cacao-Tree grows no where in the North Seas but in the Bay of Campechy on Costa Rica between Portabel and Nicaragua chiefly up Carpenters River and on this Coast as high as the Isle of Trinidada In the South Seas it grows on the River of Guiaquil a little to the Southward of the Line and in the Valley of Collina on the South side of the Continent of Mexico both which places I shall hereafter describe Besides these I am confident there is no place in the world where the Cacao grows except those in Jamaica of which there are now but few remaining of many and large Walks or Plantations of them found there by the English at their first arrival and since planted by them and even these though there is a great deal of pains and care bestowed on them yet seldom come to any thing being generally blighted The Nuts of this Coast of Caracco's though less than those of Costa Rica which are large flat Nuts yet are better and fatter in my opinion being so very oily that we are forced to use Water in rubbing them up and the Spaniards that live here instead of parching them to get off the Shell before they pound or rub them to make Chocolate do in a manner burn them to dry up the Oil for else they say it would fill them too full of blood drinking Chocolate as they do 5 or 6 times a day My worthy Consort Mr. Ringrose commends most the Guiaquil Nut I presume because he had little knowledge of the rest for being intimately acquainted with him I know the course of his Travels and Experience But I am persuaded had he known the rest so well as I pretend to have done who have at several times been long used to and in a manner lived upon all the several sorts of them above mentioned he would prefer the Caraccos Nut before any other yet possibly the drying up of these Nuts so much by the Spaniards here as I said may lessen their Esteem with those Europeans that use their Chocolate ready rubb'd up so that we always chose to make it up our selves The Cacao-Tree hath a body about a foot and an half thick the largest sort and 7 or 8 foot high to the Branches which are large and spreading like an Oak with a pretty thick smooth dark-green leaf shap'd like that of a Plumb-Tree but larger The Nuts are inclosed in Cods as big as both a Mans fists put together At the broad end of which there is a small tough limber stalk by which they hang pendulous from the body of the Tree in all parts of it from top to bottom scattered at irregular distances and from the greater branches a little way up especially at the joints of them or parting 's where they hang thickest but never on the smaller boughs There may be ordinarily about 20 or 30 of these Cods upon a well-bearing Tree and they have 2 Crops of them in a year one in December but the best in June The Cod it self or Shell is almost half an inch thick neither spongy nor woody but of a substance between both brittle yet harder than the Rind of a Lemmon like which its surface is grained or knobbed but more course and unequal The Cods at first are of a dark Green but the side of them next the Sun of a Muddy Red. As they grow ripe the Green turns to a fine bright Yellow and the Muddy to a more lively beautiful Red very pleasant to the Eye They neither ripen nor are gather'd at once but for three weeks or a month when the Season is the Overseers of the Plantations go every day about to see which are turn'd yellow cutting at once it may be not above one from a Tree The Cods thus gathered they lay in several heaps to sweat and then bursting the Shell with their hands they pull out the Nuts which are the only substance they contain having no stalk or pith among them and excepting that these Nuts lye in regular rows like the grains of Maiz but sticking together and so closely stowed that after they have been once separated it would be hard to place them again in so narrow a compass There are generally near 100 Nuts in a Cod in proportion to the greatness of which for it varies the Nuts are bigger or less When taken out they dry them in the Sun upon Mats spread on the ground after which they need no more care having a thin hard skin of their own and much Oil which preserves them Salt water will
not hurt them for we had our Bags rotten lying in the bottom of our Ship and yet the Nuts never the worse They raise the young Trees of Nuts set with the great end downward in fine black Mould and in the same places where they are to bear which they do in 4 or 5 years time without the trouble of transplanting There are ordinarily of these Trees from 500 to 2000 and upwards in a Plantation or Cacoa-walk as they call them and they shelter the young Trees from the weather with Plaintains set about them for 2 or 4 years destroying all the Plantains by such time the Cacoa-Trees are of a pretty good body and able to endure the heat which I take to be the most pernicious to them of any thing for tho these Valleys lye open to the North winds unless a little shelter'd here and there by some groves of Plaintain Trees which are purposely set near the Shores of the several Bays yet by all that I could either observe or learn the Cacao's in this Country are never blighted as I have often known them to be in other places Cacoa-Nuts are used as Money in the Bay of Campechy The chief Town of this Country is called Caraccos a good way within Land 't is a large wealthy place where live most of the Owners of these Cacao-walks that are in the Valleys by the shore the Plantations being managed by Overseers and Negro's It is in a large Savanah Country that abounds with Cattle and a Spaniard of my acquaintance a very sensible man who hath been there tells me that 't is very populous and he judges it to be 3 times as big as Coruma in Gallicia The way to it is very steep and craggy over that ridge of of Hills which I said closes up the Valleys and partition Hills of the Cacao Coast. In this Coast it self the chief place is La Guiare a good Town close by the Sea and though it hath but a bad Harbour yet it is much frequented by the Spanish shipping for the Dutch and English anchor in the sandy Bays that lye here and there in the mouths of several Valleys and where there is very good riding The Town is open but hath a strong Fort yet both were taken some years since by Captain Wright and his Privateers 'T is seared about 4 or 5 leagues to the Westward of Cape Blanco which Cape is the Eastermost boundary of this Coast of Caraccos Further Eastward about 20 leagues is a great lake or branch of the Sea called La Laguna de Vallensuella about which are many rich Towns but the mouth of the Lake is shallow that no Ships can enter Near this mouth is a place called Comana where the Privateers were once repulsed without daring to attempt it any more being the only place in the North Seas they attempted in vain for many years and the Spaniards since throw it in their teeth frequently as a word of reproach or defiance to them Not far from the place is Verina a small Village and Spanish Plantation famous for its Tobacco reputed the best in the world But to return to Caraccos all this Coast is subject to dry winds generally North-east which caused us to have scabby Lips and we always found it thus and that in different seasons of the year for I have been on this Coast several times In other respects it is very healthy and a sweet clear Air. The Spaniards have Look-outs or Scouts on the Hills and Breast-works in the Valleys and most of their Negro's are furnished with Arms also for defence of the Bays The Dutch have a very profitable Trade here almost to themselves I have known 3 or 4 great Ships at a time on the Coast each it may be of 30 or 40 Guns They carry hither all sorts of European Commodities especially Linnen making vast returns chiefly in Silver and Cacao And I have often wondred and regretted it that none of my own Countrymen find the way thither directly from England for our Jamaica-men Trade thither indeed and find the sweet of it though they carry English Commodities at second or third hand While we lay on this Coast we went ashore in some of the Bays and took 7 or 8 Tun of Cacoa and after that 3 Barks one laden with Hides the second with European Commodities the third with Earthen ware and Brandy With these 3 Barks we went again to the Islands of Roca's where we shar'd our Commodities and separated having Vessels enough to transport us all whither we thought most convenient Twenty of us for we were about 60 took one of the Vessels and our share of the goods and went directly for Virginia In our way thither we took several of the Sucking-fishes for when we see them about the Ship we cast out a Line and Hook and they will take it with any manner of Bait whether Fish or Flesh. The Sucking-fish is about the bigness of a large Whiting and much of the same shape towards the Tail but the Head is flatter From the Head to the middle of its Back there groweth a sort of flesh of a hard gristly substance like that part of the Limpit a Shell-fish tapering up Pyramidically which sticks to the Rocks or like the head or mouth of a Shell-Snail but harder This excrescence is of a flat oval form about 7 or 8 inches long and 5 or 6 broad and rising about half an inch high It is full of small ridges with which it will fasten it self to any thing that it meets with in the Sea just as a Snail doth to a Wall When any of them happen to come about a Ship they seldom leave her for they will feed on such filth as is daily thrown overboard or on meer excrements When it is fair weather and but little wind they will play about the Ship but in blustring weather or when the Ship sails quick they commonly fasten themselves to the Ships bottom from whence neither the Ships motion though never so swift nor the most tempestuous Sea can remove them They will likewise fasten themselves to any other bigger Fish for they never swim fast themselves if they meet with any thing to carry them I have found them sticking to a Shark after it was hal'd in on the deck though a Shark is so strong and boisterous a Fish and throws about him so vehemently for half an hour together it may be when caught that did not the Sucking-fish stick at no ordinary rate it must needs be cast off by so much violence It is usual also to see them sticking to Turtle to any old Trees Planks or the like that lye driving at Sea Any knobs or inqualities at a Ships bottom are a great hinderance to the swiftness of its sailing and 10 or 12 of these sticking to it must needs retard it as much in a manner as if its bottom were foul So that I am inclined to think that this Fish is the Remora of which
told them that the River Rosario is rich in Gold and that the Mines are not above 2 leagues from the Town Captain Swan did not think it convenient to go to the Mines but made haste aboard with the Maiz which he took there to the quantity of about 80 or 90 Bushels and which to us in the scarcity we were in of Provisions was at that time more valuable than all the Gold in the world and had he gone to the Mines the Spaniards would probably have destroyed the Corn before his return The 3d day of February we went with our Ships also towards the River Rosario and anchored the next day against the Rivers mouth in 7 fathom good oazy ground a league from the shore This River is in lat 22 d 51 m. N. When you are at an anchor against this River you will see a round Hill like a Sugar-loaf a little way within Land right over the River and bearing N. E. by N. To the Westward of that Hill there is another pretty long Hill called by the Spaniards Caput Cavalli or the Horse's Head The 7th day Captain Swan came aboard with the Maiz which he got This was but a small quantity for so many Men as we were especially considering the place we were in being strangers and having no Pilots to direct or guide us into any River and we being without all sort of Provision but what we were forced to get in this manner from the shore And though our Pilot-book directed us well enough to find the Rivers yet for want of Guides to carry us to the Settlements we were forced to search 2 or 3 days before we could find a place to land for as I have said before besides the Seas being too rough for landing in many places they have neither Boat Bark nor Canoa that we could ever see or hear of and therefore as there are no such landing places in these Rivers as there are in the South Seas so when we were landed we did not know which way to go to any Town except we accidentally met with a path Indeed the Spaniards and Indians whom we had aboard knew the Names of several Rivers and Towns near them and knew the Towns when they saw them but they knew not the way to go to them from the Sea The 8th day Captain Swan sent about 40 men to seek for the River Oleta which is to the East-ward of the River Rosario The next day we followed after with the Ships having the Wind at W. N. W. and fair weather In the afternoon our Canoas came again to us for they could not find the River Oleta therefore we designed next for the River St. Jago to the Eastward still The 11th day in the evening we anchored against the mouth of the River in 7 fathom water good soft oazy ground and about 2 mile from the shore There was a high white Rock without us called Maxentelbo This Rock at a distance appears like a Ship under sail it bore from us W. N. W. distant about 3 leagues The Hill Zelisco bore S. E. which is a very high Hill in the Country with a Saddle or bending on the top The River St. Jago is in 〈◊〉 22 d. 15 m. It is one of the principal Rivers on this Coast there is 10 foot Water on the bar at low Water but how much it flows here I know not The mouth of this River is near half a mile broad and very smooth entring Within the mouth it is broader for there are 3 or 4 Rivers more meet there and issue all out together The Water is brackish a great way up yet there is fresh Water to be had by digging or making Wells in the sandy Bay 2 or 3 foot deep just at the mouth of the River The 11th day Captain Swan sent 70 men in 4 Canoas into this River to seek a Town for although we had no intelligence of any yet the Country appearing very promising we did not question but they would find Inhabitants before they returned They spent 2 days in rowing up and down the Creeks and Rivers at last they came to a large Field of Maiz which was almost ripe They immediately fell to gathering as fast as they could and intended to lade the Canoas but seeing an Indian that was set to watch the Corn they quitted that troublesom and tedious work and seiz'd him and brought him aboard in hopes by his information to have some more easy and expedite way of a supply by finding Corn ready cut and dried He being examined said that there was a Town called Santa Pecaque 4 leagues from the place where he was taken and that if we designed to go thither he would undertake to be our Guide Captain Swan immediately ordered his men to make ready and the same evening went away with 8 Canoas and 140 men taking the Indian for their Guide He rowed about 5 leagues up the River and landed the next morning The River at this place was not above Pistol shot wide and the Banks pretty high one each side and the Land plain and even He left 23 men to guard the Canoas and marcht with the rest to the Town He set out from the Canoas at 6 a clock in the morning and reacht the Town by 10. The way thro which he passed was very plain part of it Wood-land part Savannahs The Savannahs were full of Horses Bulls and Cows The Spaniards seeing him coming run all away so he entered the Town without the least opposition This Town of Santa Pecaque stands on a Plain in a Savannah by the side of a VVood with many Fruit Trees about it It is but a small Town but very regular after the Spanish mode with a Parade in the midst The Houses fronting the Parade had all Balconies there were 2 Churches one against the Parade the other at the end of the Town It is inhabited most with Spaniards Their chiefest occupation is Husbandry There are also some Carriers who are imployed by the Merchants of Compostella to trade for them to and from the Mines Compostella is a rich Town about 21 leagues from hence It is the chiefest in all this part of the Kingdom and is reported to have 70 white Families which is a great matter in these parts for it may be that such a Town hath not less than 500 Families of copper-coloured People besides the white The Silver Mines are about 5 or 6 leagues from Santa Pecaque where as we were told the Inhabitants of Compostella had some hundreds of Slaves at work The Silver here and all over the Kingdom of Mexico is said to be finer and richer in proportion than that of Potosi or Peru tho the Oar be not so abundant and the Carriers of this Town of Santa Pecaque carry the Oar to Compostella where it is refined These Carriers or Sutlers also furnish the Slaves at the Mines with Maiz whereof here was great plenty now in the Town designed for that
their Banks and drown the low Land carrying great Trees into the Sea Thus it continues sometimes a week together before the Sun or Stars appear The fiercest of this weather is in the latter end of July and in August for then the Towns seem to stand in a great Pond and they go from one house to another in Canoas At this time the Water carries away all the filth and nastiness from under their Houses Whilst this tempestuous season lasts the weather is cold and chilly In September the weather is more moderate and the Winds are not so fierce nor the Rain so violent The Air thence-forward begins to be more clear and delightsome but then in the morning there are thick Fogs continuing till 10 or 11 a clock before the Sun shines out especially when it has rained in the night In October the Easterly Winds begin to blow again and bring fair weather till April Thus much concerning the natural state of Mindanao CHAP. XII Of the Inhabitants and Civil State of the Isle of Mindanao The Mindanayans Hilanoones Sologues and Alfoorees Of the Mindanayans properly so called Their Manners and Habits The Habits and Manners of their Women A Comical Custom at Mindanao Their Houses their Diet and Washings The Languages spoken there and transactions with the Spaniards Their fear of the Dutch and seeming desire of the English Their Handy crafts and peculiar sort of Smiths Bellows Their Shipping Commodities and Trade The Mindanao and Manila Tobacco A sort of Leprosie there and other Distempers Their Marriages The Sultan of Mindanao his Poverty Power Family c. The Proes or Boats here Raja Laut the General Brother to the Sultan and his Family Their way of fighting Their Religion Raja Laut's Devotion A Clock or Drum in their Mosques Of their Circumcision and the Solemnity then used Of other their Religious Observations and Superstitions Their abhorrence of Swines Flesh c. THis Island is not subject to one Prince neither is the Language one and the same but the People are much alike in colour strength and stature They are all or most of them of one Religion which is Mahometanism and their customs and manner of living are alike The Mindanao people more particularly so called are the greatest Nation in the Island and trading by Sea with other Nations they are therefore the more civil I shall say but little of the rest being less known to me but so much as hath come to my knowledge take as follows There are besides the Mindanayans the Hilanoones as they call them or the Mountaniers the Sologues and Alfoorees The Hilanoones live in the heart of the Country They have little or no commerce by Sea yet they have Proe's that row with 12 or 14 Oars apiece They enjoy the benefit of the Gold Mines and with their Gold buy foreign Commodities of the Mindanao people They have also plenty of Bees Wax which they exchange for other Commodities The Sologues inhabit the N. W. end of the Island They are the least Nation of all they Trade to Manila in Proe's and to some of the neighbouring Islands but have no commerce with the Mindanao people The Alfoorees are the same with the Mindanayans and were formerly under the subjection of the Sultan of Mindanao but were divided between the Sultan's Children and have of late had a Sultan of their own but having by Marriage contracted an alliance with the Sultan of Mindanao this has occasioned that Prince to claim them again as his Subjects and he made War with them a little after we went away as I afterwards understood The Mindanayans properly so called are men of mean statures small Limbs streight Bodies and little Heads Their Faces are oval their Fore heads flat with black small Eyes short low Noses pretty large Mouths their Lips thin and red their Teeth black yet very sound their Hair black and straight the colour of their Skin rawney but inclining to a brighter yellow than some other Indians especially the Women They have a custom to wear their Thumb-nails very long especially that on their left Thumb for they do never cut it but scrape it often They are indued with good natural Wits are ingenious nimble and active when they are minded but generally very lazy and thievish and will not work except forced by hunger This laziness is natural to most Indians but these people's laziness seems rather to proceed not so much from their natural inclinations as from the severity of their Prince of whom they stand in great awe For he dealing with them very arbitrarily and taking from them what they get this damps their industry so they never strive to have any thing but from hand to mouth They are generally proud and walk very stately They are civil enough to strangers and will easily be acquainted with them and entertain them with great freedom but they are implacable to their Enemies and very revengeful if they are injured frequently poisoning secretly those that have affronted them They wear but few Cloaths their Heads are circled with a short Turbat fringed or laced at both ends it goes once about the head and is tied in a knot the laced ends hanging down They wear Frocks and Breeches but no Stockings nor Shooes The Women are fairer than the Men and their Hair is black and long which they tie in a knot that hangs back in their poles They are more round vifaged than the Men and generally well featured only their Noses are very small and so low between their Eyes that in some of the Female Children the rising that should be between the Eyes is scarce discernable neither is there any sensible rising in their Foreheads At a distance they appear very well but being nigh these Impediments are very obvious They have very small Limbs They wear but two Garments a Frock and a sort of Petticoat the Petticoat is only a piece of Cloth sowed both ends together but it is made 2 foot too big for their Wastes so that they may wear either end uppermost that part that comes up to their Wastes because it is so much too big they gather it in their Hands and twist it till it sits close to their Wastes tucking in the twisted part between their Waste and the edge of the Petticoat which keeps it close The Frock sits loose about them and reaches down a little below the Waste The Sleeves are a great deal longer than their Arms and so small at the end that their Hands will scarce go through Being on the Sleeve sits in folds about the wrist wherein they take great pride The better sort of people have their garments made of long Cloath but the ordinary sort wear Cloth made of Plantain-tree which they call Saggen by which Name they call the Plantain They have neither Stocking nor Shooe and the Women have very small Feet The Women are very desirous of the company of Strangers especially of White Men and doubtless would be very
their yoak if they themselves had not been drawn off from this Island to Manila to resist the Chinese who threatened to invade them there When the Spaniards were gone the old Sultan of Mindanao Father to the present in whose time it was razed and demolished their Forts brought away their Guns and sent away the Friers and since that time will not suffer the Spaniards to settle on the Islands They are now most afraid of the Dutch being sensible how they have inslaved many of the neighbouring Islands For that reason they have a long time desired the English to settle among them and have offered them any convenient place to build a Fort in as the General himself told us giving this reason that they do not find the English so incroaching as the Dutch or Spanish The Dutch are no less jealous of their admitting the English for they are sensible what detriment it would be to them if the English should settle here There are but few Tradesmen at the City of Mindanao The chiefest Trades are Goldsmiths Blacksmiths and Carpenters There are but 2 or 3 Goldsmiths these will work in Gold or Silver and make any thing that you desire but they have no Shop furnished with Ware ready made for Sale Here are several Blacksmiths who work very well considering the Tools that they work with Their Bellows are much different from ours They are made of a wooden Cylinder the trunk of a Tree about 3 foot long bored hollow like a Pump and set upright on the ground on which the Fire it self is made Near the lower end there is a small hole in the side of the trunk next the Fire made to receive a Pipe through which the wind is driven to the Fire by a great bunch of fine Feathers fastned to one end of the stick which closing up the inside of the Cylinder drives the air out of the Cylinder through the pipe Two of these Trunks or Cylinders are placed so nigh together that a Man standing between them may work them both at once alternately one with each hand They have neither Vice nor Anvil but a great hard Stone or a piece of an old Gun to hammer upon yet they will perform their work making both common Utensils and Iron-works about Ships to admiration They work altogether with Charcoal Every Man almost is a Carpenter for they can all work with the Ax and Ads. Their Ax is but small and so made that they can take it out of the Helve and by turning it make an Ads of it They have no Saws but when they make Plank they split the Tree in two and make a Plank of each part planing it with the Ax and Ads. This requires much pains and takes up a great deal of time but they work cheap and the goodness of the Plank thus hewed which hath its grain preserv'd entire makes amends for their cost and pains They build good and serviceable Ships or Barks for the Sea some for Trade others for Pleasure and some Ships of War Their trading Vessels they send chiefly to Manila Thither they transport Bees-wax which I think is the only Commodity besides Gold that they vend there The Inhabitants of the City of Mindanao get a great deal of Bees-wax themselves but the greatest quantity they purchase is of the Mountaneers from whom they also get the Gold which they send to Manila and with these they buy there Calicoes Muslins and China Silk They send sometimes their Barks to Bornec and other Islands but what they transport thither or import from thence I know not The Dutch come hither in Sloops from Ternate and Tidore and buy Rice Bees-wax and Tobacco for here is a great deal of Tobacco grows on this Island more than in any Island or Country in the East Indies that I know of Manila only excepted It is an excellent sort of Tobacco but these people have not the Art of managing this Trade to their best advantage as the Spaniards have at Manila I do believe the Seeds were first brought hither from Manila by the Spaniards and even thither in all probability from America the difference between the Mindanao and Manila Tobacco is that the Mindanao Tobacco is of a darker colour and the leaf larger and grosser than the Manila Tobacco being propagated or planted in a fatter soil The Manila Tobacco is of a bright yellow colour of an indifferent size not strong but pleasant to smoak The Spaniards at Manila are very curious about this Tobacco having a peculiar way of making it up neatly in the leaf For they take 2 little sticks each about a foot long and flat and placing the stalks of the Tobacco-leaves in a row 40 or 50 of them between the two sticks they bind them hard together so that the leaves hang dangling down One of these bundles is sold for a Rial at Fort St. George but you may have 10 or 12 pound of Tobacco at Mindanao for a Rial and the Tobacco is as good or rather better than the Manila Tobacco but they have not that vent for it as the Spaniards have The Mindanao people are much troubled with a sort of Leprosie the same as we observed at Guam This distemper runs with a dry Scurf all over their bodies and causeth great itching in those that have it making them frequently scratch and scrub themselves which raiseth the outer skin in small whitish flakes like the scales of little Fish when they are raised on end with a Knife This makes their skin extraordinary rough and in some you shall see broad white spots in several parts of their body I judge such have had it but are cured for their skins were smooth and I did not perceive them to scrub themselves yet I have learnt from their own mouths that these spots were from this distemper Whether they use any means to cure themselves or whether it goes away of it self I know not but I did not perceive that they made any great matter of it for they did never refrain any company for it none of our people caught it of them for we were afraid of it and kept off They are sometimes troubled with the Small Pox but their ordinary distempers are Fevers Agues Fluxes with great pains and gripings in their guts The Country affords a great many Drugs and Medicinal Herbs whose Virtues are not unknown to some of them that pretend to cure the sick The Mindanao Men have many Wives but what Ceremonies are used when they marry I know not There is commonly a great Feast made by the Bridegroom to entertain his Friends and the most part of the night is spent in mirth The Sultan is absolute in his power over all his Subjects He is but a poor Prince for as I mentioned before they have but little Trade and therefore cannot be rich If the Sultan understands that any Man has Money if it be but 20 Dollars which is a great matter among them he will send
Head called a Gong which is instead of a Clock This Gong is beaten at 12 a Clock at 3 6 and 9 a man being appointed for that service He has a stick as big as a mans arm with a great knob at the end bigger than a mans fist made with Cotton bound fast with small Cords With this he strikes the Gong as hard as he can about 20 strokes beginning to strike leisurely the first 5 or 6 strokes then he strikes faster and at last strikes as fast as he can and then he strikes again slower and slower so many more strokes thus he rises and falls 3 times and then leaves off till 3 hours after This is done night and day They circumcise the Males at 11 or 12 years of Age or older and many are circumcised at once This Ceremony is performed with a great deal of Solemnity There had been no Circumcision for some years before our being here and then there was one for Raja Laut's Son They chuse to have a general Circumcision when the Sultan or General or some other great a person hath a Son fit to be circumcised for with him great many more are circumcised There is notice given about 8 or 10 days before for all Men to appear in Arms and great preparation is made against the solemn day In the morning before the Boys are circumcised Presents are sent to the Father of the Child that keeps the Feast which as I said before is either the Sultan or some great person and about 10 or 11 a clock the Mahometan Priest does his Office He takes hold of the fore-skin with two sticks and with a pair of Scizzars snips it off After this most of the Men both in City and Country being in Arms before the House begin to act as if they were ingag'd with an Enemy having such Arms as I described Only one acts at a time the rest make a great Ring of 2 or 300 yards round about him He that is to exercise comes into the Ring with a great shriek or two and a horrid look then he fetches 2 or 3 large stately strides and falls to work He holds his broad Sword in one hand and his Lance in the other and traverses his ground leaping from one side of the Ring to the other and in a menacing posture and look bids defiance to the Enemy whom his fancy frames to him for there is nothing but air to oppose him Then he stamps and shakes his Head and grinning with his Teeth makes many ruful faces Then he throws his Lance and nimbly snatches out his Cresset with which he hacks and hews the air like a mad man often shrieking At last being almost tired with motion he flies to the middle of the Ring where he seems to have his Enemy at his mercy and with 2 or 3 blows cuts on the ground as if he was cutt ng off his Enemy's Head By this time he is all of a sweat and withdraws triumphantly out of the Ring and presently another enters with the like shrieks and gestures Thus they continue combating their imaginary Enemy all the rest of the day towards the conclusion of which the richest men act and at last the General and then the Sultan concludes this Ceremony He and the General with some other great Men are in Armour but the rest have none After this the Sultan returns home accompanied with abundance of people who wait on him there till they are dismist But at the time when we were there there was an after-game to be played for the General 's Son being then Circumcised the Sultan intended to give him a second visit in the night so they all waited to attend him thither The General also provided to meet him in the best manner and therefore desired Captain Swan with his men to attend him Accordingly Captain Swan ordered us to get our Guns and wait at the Generals house till further orders So about 40 of us waited till 8 a clock in the evening When the General with Captain Swan and about 1000 men went to meet the Sultan with abundance of Torches that made it as light day The manner of the march was thus First of all there was a Pageant and upon it two dancing Women gorgeously apparelled with Coronets on their Heads full of glistering Spangles and Pendants of the same hanging down over their Breast and Shoulders These are Women bred up purposely for dancing Their Feet and Legs are but little imployed except sometimes to turn round very gently but their Hands Arms Head and Body are in continual motion especially their Arms which they turn and twist so strangely that you would think them to be made without Bones Besides the two dancing Women there were two old Women in the Pageant holding each a lighted Torch in their Hands close by the two dancing Women by which light the glittering Spangles appeared very gloriously This Pageant was carried by six lusty men Then came 6 or 7 Torches lighting the General and Captain Swan who marched side by side next and we that attended Captain Swan followed close after marching in order 6 and 6 abreast with each man his Gun on his Shoulder and Torches on each side After us came 12 of the Generals men with old Spanish Match-locks marching 4 in a row After them about 40 Lances and behind them as many with great Swords marching all in order After them came abundance only with Cressets by their sides who marched up close without any order When we came near the Sultans house the Sultan and his men met us and we wheeled off to let them pass The Sultan had 3 Pageants went before him In the first Pageant were 4 of his Sons who were about 10 or 11 years old They had gotten abundance of small Stones which they roguishly threw about on the peoples heads In the next were 4 young Maidens Nieces to the Sultan being his Sisters Daughters and in the 3d there were 3 of the Sultans Children not above 6 years old The Sultan himself followed next being carried in his Couch which was not like your Indian Palankins but open and very little and ordinary A multitude of people came after without any order but as soon as he was past by the General and Captain Swan and all our men closed in just behind the Sultan and so all marched together to the Generals house We came thither between 10 and 11 a clock where the biggest part of the company were immediately dismist but the Sultan and his Children and his Nieces and some other Persons of Quality entred the Generals house They were met at the head of the Stairs by the Generals women who with a great deal of respect conducted them into the house Captain Swan and we that were with him followed after It was not long before the General caused his dancing Women to enter the Room and divert the company with that pastime I had forgot to tell you that they have none but
work on Bashee Island which Island they gave that name to from their drinking this Liquor there that being the name which the Natives call'd this Liquor by and as they sold it to our men very cheap so they did not spare to drink it as freely And indeed from the plenty of this Liquor and their plentiful use of it our Men call'd all these Islands the Bashee Islands What Language these people do speak I know not for it had no affinity in sound to the Chinese which is spoke much through the teeth nor yet to the Malayan Language They called the Metal that their Ear-rings were made of Bullawan which is the Mindanao word for Gold therefore probably they may be related to the Philippine Indians for that is the general Name for Gold among all those Indians I could not learn from whence they have their Iron but it is most likely they go in their great Boats to the North end of Luconia and trade with the Indians of that Island for it Neither did I see any thing beside Iron and pieces of Buffaloes Hides which I could judge that they bought of Strangers Their Cloaths were of their own growth and manufacture These men had Wooden Lances and a few Lances headed with Iron which are all the Weapons that they have Their Armour is a piece of Buffaloe-hide shaped like our Carters Frocks being without Sleeves and sowed both sides together with holes for the Head and the Arms to come forth This Buff-Coat reaches down to their Knees It is close about their Shoulders but below it is 3 foot wide and as thick as a Board I could never perceive them to worship any thing neither had they any Idols neither did they seem to observe any one day more than other I could never perceive that one man was of greater power than another but they seemed to be all equal only every man ruling in his own House and the Children respecting and honouring their Parents Yet 't is probable that they have some Law or Custome by which they are governed for while we lay here we saw a young man buried alive in the Earth and 't was for Theft as far as we could understand from them There was a great deep hole dug and abundance of people came to the place to take their last farewel of him Among the rest there was one Woman who made great lamentation and took off the condemned persons Ear-rings We supposed her to be his Mother After he had taken his leave of her and some others he was put into the pit and covered over with Earth He did not struggle but yielded very quietly to his punishment and they cramm'd the Earth close upon him and stifled him They have but one Wife with whom they live and agree very well and their Children live very obediently under them The Boys go out a Fishing with their Fathers and the Girls live at home with their Mothers and when the Girls are growâ—… pretty strong they send them to their Plantations to dig Yames and Potatoes of which they bring home on their heads every day enough to serve the whole family for they have no Rice nor Maiz. Their Plantations are in the Valleys at a good distance from their Houses where every man has a certain spot of Land which is properly his own This he manageth himself for his own use and provides enough that he may not be beholding to his neighbour Notwithstanding the seeming nastiness of their Dish of Goats Maw they are in their Persons a very neat cleanly people both Men and Women And they are withal the quietest and civilest people that I did ever meet with I could never perceive them to be angry with one another I have admired to see 20 or 30 Boats aboard our Ship at a time and yet no difference among them but all civil and quiet endeavouring to help each other on occasion No noise nor appearance of distaste and although sometimes cross accidents would happen which might have set other men together by the ears yet they were not moved by them Sometimes they will also drink freely and warm themselves with their drink yet neither then could I ever perceive them out of humour They are not only thus civil among themselves but very obliging and kind to strangers nor were their Children rude to us as is usual Indeed the Women when we came to their houses would modestly beg any Rags or small pieces of Cloath to swaddle their young ones in holding out their Children to us and begging is usual among all these wild Nations Yet neither did they beg so importunately as in other places nor did the Men ever beg any thing at all Neither except once at the first time that we came to an Anchor as I shall relate did they steal any thing but deal justly and with great sincerity with us and make us very welcome to their houses with Bashee drink If they had none of this Liquor themselves they would buy a Jar of Drink of their neighbours and sit down with us for we could see them go and give a piece or two of their Gold for some Jars of Bashee And indeed among Wild Indians as these seem to be I wonder'd to see buying and selling which is not so usual nor to converse so freely as to go aboard strangers Ships with so little caution Yet their own small Trading may have brought them to this At these Entertainments they and their Family Wife and Children drank out of small Callabashes and when by themselves they drink about from one to another but when any of us came among them then they would always drink to one of us They have no sort of Coin but they have small crumbs of the Metal before described which they bind up very safe in Plantain Leaves or the like This Metal they exchange for what they want giving a small quantity of it about 2 or 3 grains for a Jar of Drink that would hold 5 or 6 Gallons They have no Scales but give it by guess Thus much in general To proceed therefore with our affairs I have said before that we anchored here the 6th day of August While we were furling our Sails there came near 100 Boats of the Natives aboard with 3 or 4 Men in each so that our Deck was full of Men. We were at first afraid of them and therefore got up 20 or 30 small Arms on our Poop and kept 3 or 4 Men as Centinels with Guns in their hands ready to fire on them if they had offered to molest us But they were pretty quiet only they pickt up such old Iron that they found on our Deck and they also took out our Pump Bolts and Linch-Pins out of the Carriages of our Guns before we perceived them At last one of our Men perceived them very busy getting out one of our Linch Pins and took hold of the fellow who immediately bawl'd out and all the rest presently leaped
place called Callasusung being the chief if there were more which we knew not It is about a mile from the Sea on the top of a small Hill in a very fair Plain incompassed with Coco-nut Trees Without the Trees there is a strong Stone Wall clear round the Town The Houses are built like the Houses at Mindanao but more neat and the whole Town was very clean and delightsome The Inhabitants are small and well shaped They are much like the Mindanaians in shape colour and habit but more neat and tight They speak the Malayan Language and are all Mahometans They are very obedient to the Sultan who is a little Man about 40 or 50 years old and hath a great many Wives and Children About an hour after we came to an anchor the Sultan sent a Messenger aboard to know what we were and what our business We gave him an account and he returned ashore and in a short time after he came aboard again and told us that the Sultan was very well pleased when he heard that we were English and said that we should have any thing that the Island afforded and that he himself would come aboard in the morning Therefore the Ship was made clean and every thing put in the best order to receive him The 6th day in the morning betimes a great many Boats and Canoas came aboard with Fowls Eggs Plantains Potatoes c. but they would dispose of none till they had order for it from the Sultan at his coming About 10 a clock the Sultan came aboard in a very neat Proe built after the Mindanao fashion There was a large white Silk Flag at the head of the Mast edged round with a deep red for about 2 or 3 inches broad and in the middle there was neatly drawn a Green Griffon trampling on a winged Serpent that seemed to struggle to get up and threatned his Adversary with open mouth and with a long Sting that was ready to be darted into his Legs Other East Indian Princes have their Devices also The Sultan with 3 or 4 of his Nobles and 3 of his Sons sate in the House of the Proe His Guards were 10 Musqueteers 5 standing on one side of the Proe and 5 on the other side and before the door of the Proe-house stood one with a great broad Sword and a Target and 2 more such at the after part of the House and in the head and stern of the Proe stood 4 Musqueteers more 2 at each end The Sultan had a Silk Turbat laced with narrow Gold Lace by the sides and broad Lace at the end which hung down on one side the head after the Mindanayan fashion He had a sky-coloured Silk pair of Breeches and a piece of red Silk thrown cross his shoulders and hanging lose about him the greatest part of his back and waste appearing naked He had neither Stocking nor Shoe One of his Sons was about 15 or 16 year old the other two were young things and they were always in the arms of one or other of his Attendants Captain Read met him at the side and led him into his small Cabbin and fired 5 Guns for his welcome Assoon as he came aboard he gave leave to his Subjects to traffick with us and then our People bought what they had a mind to The Sultan seemed very well pleased to be visited by the English and said he had coveted to have a sight of Englishmen having heard extraordinary characters of their just and honorable dealings but he exclaimed against the Dutch as all the Mindanayans and all the Indians we met with do and wisht them at a greater distance For Macasser is not very far from hence one of the chiefest Towns that the Dutch have in those parts From thence the Dutch come sometimes hither to purchase Slaves The Slaves that these People get here and sell to the Dutch are some of the idolatrous Natives of the Island who not being under the Sultan and having no head live straggling in the Country flying from one place to another to preserve themselves from this Prince and his Subjects who hunt after them to make them Slaves For the civilized Indians of the maritime places who trade with Foreigners if they cannot reduce the inland people to the Obedience of their Prince they catch all they can of them and sell them for Slaves accounting them to be but as Savages just as the Spaniards do the poor Americans After two or three hours discourse the Sultan went ashore again and 5 Guns were fired at his departure also The next day he sent for Captain Read to come ashore and he with 7 or 8 Men went to wait on the Sultan I could not slip an opportunity of seeing the place and so accompanied them We were met at the landing place by two of the chief Men and guided to a pretty neat House where the Sultan waited our coming The House stood at the farther end of all the Town before mention'd which we past through and abundance of people were gazing on us as we past by When we came near the House there were 40 poor naked Soldiers with Musquets made a Lane for us to pass through This House was not built on Posts as the rest were after the Mindanayan way but the room in which we were entertained was on the ground covered with Mats to sit on Our Entertainment was Tobacco and Betel-nut and young Coco-nuts and the House was beset with Men Women and Children who thronged to get near the VVindows to look on us We did not tarry above an hour before we took our leaves and departed This Town stands in a sandy Soil but what the rest of the Island is I know not for none of us were ashore but at this place The next day the Sultan came aboard again and presented Captain Read with a little Boy but he was too small to be serviceable on board and so Captain Read returned thanks and told him he was too little for him Then the Sultan sent for a bigger Boy which the Captain accepted This Boy was a very pretty tractable Boy but what was wonderful in him he had two rows of Teeth one within another on each Jaw None of the other people were so nor did I ever see the like The Captain was presented also with two He-goats and was promised some Buffaloe but I do believe that they have but few of either on the Island We did not see any Buffaloe nor many Goats neither have they much Rice but their chiefest food is Roots We bought here about a thousand pound weight of Potatoes Here our men bought also abundance of Crockadores and fine large Parakites curiously coloured and some of the finest I ever saw The Crockadore is as big as a Parrot and shaped much like it with such a Bill but is as white as Milk and hath a bunch of feathers on his head like a Crown At this place we bought a Proe also of the
this means is at least 3 months within 4 degrees of the Zenith so that they have the Sun in a manner over their heads from the beginning of May till the latter end of July Whereas when the Sun comes under the Line in March or September it immediately posts away to the North or the South and is not 20 days in passing from 3 degrees on one side to 3 degrees on the other side the Line So that by his small stay there the heat cannot be answerable to what it is near the Tropick where he so long continues in a manner Vertical at Noon and is so much longer above the Horizon each paaticular day with the intervening of a shorter night But to return to Tonquin During the wet months there 't is excessive hot especially whenever the Sun breaks out of the Clouds and there is then but little Wind stirring And I have been told by a Gentleman who liv'd there many years that he thought it was the hottest place that ever he was in tho he had been in many other parts of India And as to the Rains it has not the least share of them tho neither altogether the greatest of what I have met with in the Torrid Zone and even in the same Latitude and on the same side of the Equator The wet season begins here the latter end of April or the beginning of May and holds till the latter end of August in which time are very violent Rains some of many hours others of 2 or 3 days continuance Yet are not these Rains without some considerable intervals of fair weather especially toward the beginning or end of the season By these Rains are caus'd those Land-floods which never fail in these Countries between the Tropicks at their annual periods all the Rivers then overflowing their Banks This is a thing so well known to all who are any way acquainted with the Torrid Zone that the cause of the overflowing of the Nile to find out which the Ancients set their wits so much upon the rack and fancied melting of Snows and blowing of Etesiae and I know not what is now no longer a secret For these floods must needs discharge themselves upon such low Lands as lie in their way as the Land of Egypt does with respect to the Nile coming a great way from within the Torrid Zone and falling down from the higher Ethiopia And any one who will be at the pains to compare the time of the Land flood in Egypt with that of the Torrid Zone in any of the parts of it along which the Nile runs will find that of Egypt so much later than the other as 't will be thought reasenable to allow for the daily progress of the Waters along so vast a tract of Ground They might have made the same wonderment of any other Rivers which run any long course from out the Torrid Zone but they knowing only the North Temperate Zone and the Nile being the only great River known to come thither a great way from a Country near the Line they made that only the subject of their enquiry but the same effect must also follow from any great River that should run from out of the Torrid Zone into the South Temperate Zone And as to the Torrid Zone the yearly floods and their cause are every where as well known by people there as the Rivers themselves In America particularly in Campeachy Rivers in Rio Grande and others 't is a vast havock is made by these floods bringing down sometimes Trees of an incredible bigness and these floods always come at the stated season of the year In the dry part of Peru along the coasts of Pacifick Sea where it never rains as it seldom does in Egypt they have not only Floods but Rivers themselves made by the annual falling of Rain on the Mountains within Land the Channels of which are dry all the rest of the year This I have observ'd concerning the River Ylo on the Coast of Peru in my former Volume p. 95. But it has this difference from the Floods of Egypt that besides its being a River in the Torrid Zone 't is also in South Latitude and so overflows at a contrary season of the year to wit at such time as the Sun being in Southern Signs causes the Rains and Floods on that side the Line But to return from this digression in August the weather at Tonquin is more moderate as to heat or wet yet not without some showers and September and October are more temperate still yet the worst weather in all the year for Seamen is in one of the 3 months last mentioned for then the violent Storms called Tuffoons Typhones are expected These winds are so very fierce that for fear of them the Chinese that Trade thither will not stir out of Harbour till the end of October after which month there is no more danger of any violent Storms till the next year Tuffoons are a particular kind of violent Storms blowing on the Coast of Tonquin and the neighboring Coasts in the months of July August and September They commonly happen near the full or change of the Moon and are usually preceded by very fair weather small winds and a clear Sky Those small winds veer from the common Trade of that time of the year which is here at S. W. and shuffles about to the N. and N. E. Before the Storm comes there appears a boding Cloud in the N. E. which is very black near the Horizon but towards the upper edge it looks of a dark copper colour and higher still it is brighter and afterwards it fades to a whitish glaring colour at the very edge of the Cloud This appears very amazing and ghastly and is sometimes seen 12 hours before the Storm comes When that Cloud begins to move apace you may expect the Wind presently It comes on fierce and blows very violent at N. E. 12 hours more or less It is also commonly accompanied with terrible claps of Thunder large and frequent flashes of Lightning and excessive hard rain When the Wind begins to abate it dyes away suddenly and falling flat calm it continues so an hour more or less then the wind comes about to the S. W. and it blows and rains as fierce from thence as it did before at N. E. and as long November and December are 2 very dry wholesom warm and pleasant months January February and March are pretty dry but then you have thick fogs in the morning and sometimes drisling cold rains the Air also in these 3 months particularly in January and February is very sharp especially when the wind is at North East or North North East whether because of the Quarter it blows from or the Land it blows over I know not for I have elsewhere observ'd such Winds to be Colder where they have come from over Land April is counted a moderate month either as to heat or cold driness or moisture This is ordinarily the
notwithstanding these they are seldom out of mire and wet even in the midst of the Village or Garden so long as that season lasts The Inhabitants of the higher part of the Kingdom are not troubled with such inconveniencies but live more cleanly and comfortably forasmuch as their Land is never overflown with water and tho they live also in Villages or Towns as the former yet they have no occasion to surround them with banks or trenches but lie open to the Forest. The Capital City Cachao which stands in the high Country about 80 miles from the Sea on the West side of the River and on a pretty level yet rising ground lies open in the same manner without wall bank or ditch There may be in Cachao about 20000 Houses The Houses are generally low the walls of the Houses are of mud and the covering thatch yet some are built with brick and the covering with pantile Most of these Houses have a yard or backside belonging to them In each yard you shall see a small arched building made somewhat like an Oven about 6 foot high with the mouth on the ground It is built from top to bottom with brick all over daub'd thick with mud and dirt If any house wants a yard they have nevertheless such a kind of Oven as this but smaller set up in the middle of the House it self and there is scarce a house in the City without one The use of it is to thrust their chiefest goods into when a Fire happens for these low thatch'd Houses are very subject to take fire especially in the dry times to the destruction of many Houses in an instant that often they have scarce time to secure their goods in the arched Ovens tho so near them As every private person hath this contrivance to secure his own goods when a Fire happens so the Government hath carefully ordered necessary means to be used for the preventing of Fire or extinguishing it before it gets too great a head For in the beginning of the dry season every man must keep a great Jar of water on the top of his House to be ready to pour down as occasion shall serve Besides this he is to keep a long pole with a basket or bowl at the end of it to throw water out of the Kennels upon the houses But if the Fire gets to such a head that both these expedients fail then they cut the straps that hold the Thatch of the Houses and let it drop from the rafters to the ground This is done with little trouble for the Thatch is not laid on as ours neither is it tyed on by single leaves as in the West Indies and many parts of the East Indies where they Thatch with Palmeto or Palm tree leaves but this is made up in Panes of 7 or 8 foot square before it is laid on so that 4 or 6 Panes more or less according to the bigness of the House will cover one side of it and these Panes being only fastned in a few places to the rafters with Rattans they are easily cut and down drops half the covering at once These panes are also better than loose thatch as being more managable in case any of them should fall on or near near the Oven where the Goods are for they are easily dragg'd off to another place The Neighbouring Houses may this way be soon uncovered before the flame comes to them and the Thatch either carried away or at least laid where it may burn by itself And for this purpose every man is ordered to keep a long Pole or Bambo at his door with a Cutting-hook at the end of it purposely for uncovering the houses and if any man is found without his Jar upon the house and his Bucket-pole and long Hook at his door he will be punish'd severely for his neglect They are rigorous in exacting this for even with all this caution they are much and often damaged by Fire The principal streets in this City are very wide tho some are but narrow They are most of them pav'd or pitch'd rather with small Stones but after a very ill manner In the wet season they are very dirty and in the dry time there are many stagnant ponds and some ditches full of black stinking mud in and about the City This makes it unpleasant and a man would think unwholesome too yet it is healthy enough as far as I perceiv'd or could ever learn The Kings of Tonquin who make this City their constant Residence have two or three Palaces in it such as they be Two of them are very mean they are built with timber yet have they many great Guns planted in Houses near them Stables for the Kings Elephants and Horses and pretty large square spots of ground for the Soldiers to draw themselves up regularly before him The third Palace is call'd the Palace Royal It is more magnificently built than the other two yet built also with timber but all open as the Divans in Turky are said to be The wall that incompasseth it is most remarkable It is said to be 3 leagues in circumference The heighth of this Wall is about 15 or 16 foot and almost as many broad or thick It is faced up on both sides with Brick there are several small Gates to go in and out at but the main Gate faceth to the City This they say is never opened but when the Boua or Emperor goes in or comes out There are two smaller Gates adjoyning to it one on each side which are opened on all occasions for any concern'd there to pass in and out but strangers are not permitted this liberty Yet they may ascend to the top of the Wall and walk round it there being stairs at the Gate to go up by and in some places the Walls are fallen down Within this Wall there are large Fish-ponds where also there are Pleasure-Boats for the Emperors diversion I shall defer speaking of him whose Prison this is rather than Court till the next Chapter where I shall discourse of the Government The house of the English Factory who are very few is pleasantly seated on the North end of the City fronting to the River 'T is a pretty handsome low built House the best that I saw in the City There is a handsome Dining-room in the middle and at each end convenient apartments for the Merchants Factors and Servants belonging to the Company to live in with other conveniences This House stands parallel with the River and at each end of it there are smaller Houses for other uses as Kitchin Store-Houses c. runing in a line from the great House towards the River making two Wings and a square Court open to the River In this square space near the banks of the River there stands a Flag-staff purposely for the hoysing up the English Colours on all occasions for it is the custom of our Countrymen aboard to let fly their Colours on Sundays and all other remarkable
days The Dutch Factory joyns to the English Factory on the South side I was never in it and therefore can say nothing of it but what I have heard that their ground is not so large as ours tho they are the longest standers here by many years for the English are but newly removed hither from Hean where they resided altogether before There is nothing more in or about the City worth noting but only a piece of work on the same side up the River This is a massy frame of Timber ingeniously put together and very artificially placed on great piles that are set upright in the River just by its banks The piles are driven firmly into the ground close one by another and all the space between them and the bank is filled up with stones and on them great Trees laid across and pinn'd fast at each end to the piles so that the whole fabrick must be moved before any part of it will yield This piece of work is raised about 16 or 17 foot above the water in the dry time but in the wet season the floods come within 2 or 3 foot of the top It was made to resist the violence of the water in the rainy season for the stream then presseth so hard against this place that before this pile was built it broke down the bank and threatned to carry all before it even to the ruining of the City if this course had not timely been taken to prevent it And so much the rather because there is a large pond just within Land and low ground between it and the City so that had it made but a small breach into the pond it would have come even to the skirts of the City And tho the City stands so high as that the Land floods never reach it yet the Land on which it stands being a sort of yielding Sand could not be thought capable of always resisting such violence For the natural floods do very often make great changes in the River breaking down one point of Land and making another point in the opposite side of the River and that chiefly in this part of the Country where it is bounded with high banks for nearer the Sea where it presently overflows the floods do seldom make any consideable change and move more quietly But to return to the people They are courteous and civil to strangers especially the trading people but the great men are proud haughty and ambitious and the Souldiers very insolent The poorer sort are very Thievish insomuch that the Factors and Strangers that traffick hither are forced to keep good watch in the night to secure their goods notwithstanding thesevere punishments they have against Thieves They have indeed great opportunities of Thieving the Houses being so slightly built but they will work a way under ground rather than fail anduse many subtle stratagems I am a stranger to any ceremonies used by them in Marriage or at the Birth of a Child or the like if they use any Polygamy is allowed of in this Country and they buy their Wives of the Parents The King and and great Men keep several as their inclinations lead them and their ability serves The poor are stinted for want of means more than desire for tho many are not able to buy much less to maintain one Wife yet most of them make a shift to get one for here are some very low prized ones that are glad to take up with poor Husbands But then in hard times the man must sell both Wife and Children to buy Rice to maintain himself Yet this is not so common here as in some places as I before observed of the Malabar and Coromandel Coasts This custom among them of buying Wives easily degenerates into that other of hiring Misses and gives great liberty to the young Women who offer themselves of their own accord to any strangers who will go to their price There are of them of all prizes from 100 Dollars to 5 Dollars and the refuse of all will be caressed by the poor Seamen Such as the Lascars who are Moors of India coming hither in Vessels from Fort St. George and other places who yet have nothing to give them but such fragments of Food as their Commons will afford Even the great men of Tonquin will offer their Daughters to the Merchants and Officers tho their stay is not likely to be above 5 or 6 Months in the Country neither are they affraid to be with Child by White men for the Children will be much fairer than their Mothers and consequently of greater repute when they grow up if they be Girls Nor is it any great charge to breed them here and at the worst if their Mothers are not able to maintain them 't is but selling them when they are young But to return the Women who thus let themselves to hire if they have been so frugal as to save what they have got by these loose amours they soon procure Husbands that will love and esteem them well enough and themselves also will prove afterwards obedient and faithful Wives For 't is said that even while they are with strangers they are very faithful to them especially to such as remain long in the Country or make annual returns hither as the Dutch generally do Many of these have gotten good Estates by their Tonquin Ladies and that chiefly by trusting them with Money and Goods For in this poor Country 't is a great advantage to watch the Market and these female Merchants having stocks will mightily improve them taking their opportunities of buying raw Silk in the dead time of the year With this they will employ the poor people when work is scarce and get it cheaper and better done than when Ships are here for then every man being employed and in a hurry of business he will have his price according to the haste of work And by this means they will get their Goods ready against the Ships arrive and before the ordinary working season to the profit both of the Merchant and the Pagally When a man dyes he is interr'd in his own Land for here are no common Burying-places and within a month afterwards the friends of the deceased especially if he was the master of the family must make a great feast of Flesh and Fruit at the Grave 'T is a thing belonging to the Priests office to assist at this solemnity they are always there and take care to see that the friends of the deceased have it duly performed To make this Feast they are obliged to sell a piece of Land tho they have Money enough otherways which Money they bestow in such things as are necessary for the solemnity which is more or less according to the quality of the deceased If he was a great man there is a Tower of Wood erected over the Grave it may be 7 or 8 foot square and built 20 or 25 foot high About 20 yards from the Tower are little Sheds built
sail and they have thus vanished on a sudden The Fish which they take near the shore with their Nets are Snooks Dog-fish and sometimes Tarpoms The Tarpom is a large scaly Fish shaped much like a Salmon but somewhat flatter 'T is of a dull Silver Colour with Scales as big as a Half Crown A large Tarpom will weigh 25 or 30 Pound 'T is good sweet wholsom Meat and the Flesh solid and firm In its Belly you shall find two large Scalops of Fat weighing two or three Pound each I never knew any taken with Hook and Line but are either with Nets or by striking them with Harpoons at which the Moskito-Men are very expert The Nets for this purpose are made with strong double Twine the Meshes 5 or 6 Inches square For if they are too small so that the Fish be not intangled therein he presently draws himself a little backward and then springs over the Net Yet I have seen them taken in a Sain made with small Meshes in this manner After we have inclosed a great number whilst the two ends of the Net were drawing ashore 10 or 12 naked Men have followed and when a Fish struck against the Net the next Man to it grasped both Net and Fish in his Arms and held all fast till others came to his assistance Besides these we had three Men in a Canoa in which they mov'd side ways after the Net and many of the Fish in springing over the Net would fall into the Canoa And by these means we should take two or 3 at every Draught These Fish are found plentifully all along that shore from Cape Catoch to Trist especially in clear Water near sandy Bays but no where in muddy or rocky Ground They are also about Jamaica and all the Coast of the Main especially near Carthagena West from Rio de la Gartos there is a Look-out or Watch-tower called Selam This is a Place close by the shore contrived by the Spaniards for their Indians to watch in There are many of them on this Coast Some built from the Ground with Timber others only little Cages placed on a Tree big enough for one or two Men to sit in with a Ladder to go up and down These Watch-towers are never without an Indian or two all the day long the Indians who live near any of them being obliged to take their turns About three or four Leagues Westward of Selam is another Watch-Box on a High Tree called Linchanchee Lookout from a large Indian Town of that Name 4 Leagues up in the Country and two Leagues farther within Land is another Town called Chinchanchee I have been ashore at these Look-outs and have been either rowing in a Canoa or walking ashore on all this Coast even from Rio de la Gartos to Cape Condecedo but did never see any Town by the shore nor any Houses besides Fishing-hutts on all the Coast except only at Sisal Between Selam and Linchanchee are many small regular Salt Ponds divided from each other by little Banks the biggest Pond not above 10 Yards long and 6 broad The Inhabitants of these two Towns attend these Ponds in the Months of May June and July to gather the Salt which supplies all the Inland Towns of these Parts and there is a skirt of Wood between the Sea and the Ponds that you can neither see them nor the People at Work till you come ashore From these Salt Ponds further West about three or four Leagues is the Look-out called Sisal This is the highest and most remarkable on all the Coast it stands close by the Sea and it is built with Timber This is the first Object that we make off at Sea and sometimes we take it for a Sail till running nearer we discover the high Mangrove-trees appearing in small Tufts at several Distances from it Not far from hence there is a Fort with 40 or 50 Soldiers to Guard the Coast and from this Place there is a Road through the Country to the City of Merida This is the chiefest City in all the Province of Jucatan it being inhabited mostly with Spaniards Yet there are many Indian Families among them who live in great subjection as do the rest of the Indians of this Country The Province of Jucatan especially this Northern and the most Easterly Part of it is but indifferently fruitful in comparison of that rich Soil farther to the West Yet is it pretty populous of Indians who all live together in Towns but none within five or six Miles of the Sea except as I said at two or three Fishing Places and even there the Indians resort to fish but at certain Seasons of the Year Therefore when Privateers come on this Coast they fear not to Land and ramble about as if they were in their own Country seeking for Game of any sort either Fowl or Deer of both which there are great plenty especially of the latter though sometimes they pay dear for it A small Jamaica Privateer once Landed 6 or 7 Men at this Look-out of Sisal who not suspecting any danger ordered the Canoa with 3 or 4 Men to row along by the shore to take them in upon their giving a sign or firing a Gun But within half an hour they were attack'd by about 40 Spanish Soldiers who had cut them off from the shore to whom they surrendred themselves Prisoners The Spaniards carried them in triumph to the Fort and then demanded which was the Captain Upon this they all stood mute for the Captain was not among them and they were afraid to tell the Spaniards so for fear of being all hanged for Straglers Neither did any one of them dare to assume that Title because they had no Commission with them nor the Copy of it for the Captains don't usually go ashore without a Copy at least of their Commission which is wont to secure both themselves and their Men. At last one John Hullock cock'd up his little cropt Hat and told them that he was the Captain and the Spaniards demanding his Commission he said it was aboard for that he came ashore only to hunt not thinking to have met any Enemy The Spaniards were well satisfied with this Answer and afterwards respected him as the Captain and served him with better Provision and Lodging than the rest and the next day when they were sent to the City of Merida about 12 or 13 Leagues from thence Captain Hullock had a Horse to ride on while the rest went on Foot And though they were all kept in close Prison yet Hullock had the honour to be often sent for to be examined at the Governours House and was frequently Regal'd with Chocolate c. From thence they were carried to Campeachy Town where still Captain Hullock was better served than his Comrades At last I know not how they all got their Liberties and Hullock was ever after call'd Captain Jack It is about 8 Leagues from Sisal to Cape Condecedo Twenty Leagues North of which
lyes a small Island call'd by the Spaniards Isles des Arenas but the English Seamen as is usual with them corrupt the Name strangely and some call it the Desarts others the Desarcusses but of this Island having never seen it I can give no Account All this Coast from Cape Catoch to Cape Condecedo is Low-Land the Mount only excepted It is most sandy Bay by the Sea yet some of it is Mangrovy-Land within which you have some spots of dry Savanah and small scrubbed Trees with short thick Bushes among them The Sea deepens gradually from the shore and Ships may Anchor in sandy Ground in any depth from 7 or 8 Foot to 10 or 12 Fathom Water In some Places on this Coast we reckon our distance from the shore by the depth of the Sea allowing 4 Fathom for the first League and for every Fathom afterward a League more But having got thus to Cape Condecedo I shall defer the further description of these Parts from this Cape Southward and Westward to the High-Land of St. Martin which is properly the Bay of Campeachy and from thence also further Westward till my second coming on this Coast when I made so long a stay here To proceed therefore with my prefent Voyage having past Cape Catoch the Mount Rio de la Gartos Sisal and Cape Condecedo we stood Southward directly for Trist the Haven of our Logwood-Cutters at which Place being not above 60 Leagues distant we soon arrived Trist is the Road only for big Ships Smaller Vessels that draw but a little Water run 3 Leagues farther by crossing over a great Lagune that runs from the Island up into the Main-Land where they anchor at a Place called One Bush-Key We stayed at Trist 3 days to fill our Water and then with our 2 Consorts sailed thence with the Tide of Blood and the same Tide arrived there This Key is not above 40 Paces long and 5 or 6 broad having only a little crooked Tree growing on it and for that reason it is called One-Bush-Key It seems to be only a heap of Shells for the Island is covered with them The greatest part are Oyster-shells There are a great many Oyster-banks in this Lagune and the adjacent Creeks but none afford better either for largeness or taste than the Bank about this Island In the wet Season the Oysters as well of One-Bush-Key as other Places here are made fresh by the Freshes running out of the Country But in the dry Time they are salt enough In the Creeks they are smaller but more numerous and the Mangrove-Roots that grow by the sides of the Creeks are loaden with them and so are all the Branches that hang in the Water One-Bush-Key is about a Mile from the shore and just against the Island is a small Creek that runs a Mile farther and then opens into another wide Lagune and through this Creek the Logwood is brought to the Ships riding at the Key Between the Oyster-Banks that lye about the Island and the Main there is good Riding in about 12 Foot Water The bottom is very soft Oaz insomuch that we are forced to shoo our Anchors to make them hold The Main by it is all Low Mangrovy-Land which is over-flow'd every Tide and in the Wet Season is covered with Water Here we lay to take in our Lading Our Cargo to purchase Logwood was Rum and Sugar a very good Commodity for the Logwood-Cutters who were then about 250 Men most English that had settled themselves in several Places hereabouts Neither was it long before we had these Merchants came aboard to visit us we were but 6 Men and a Boy in the Ship and all little enough to entertain them for besides what Rum we sold by the Gallon or Ferkin we sold it made into Punch wherewith they grew Frolicksom We had none but small Arms to fire at their drinking Healths and therefore the noise was not very great at a distance but on Board the Vessels we were loud enough till all our Liquor was spent We took no Money for it nor expected any for Logwood was what we came hither for and we had of that in lieu of our Commodities after the rate of 5 Pound per Tun to be paid at the Place where they cut it and we went with our Long-boat to fetch small Quanties But because it would have taken up a long time to Load our Vessel with our own Boat only we hired a Periago of the Logwood-Cutters to bring it on Board and by that means made the quicker dispatch I made two or three Trips to their Huts where I and those with me were always very kindly entertained by them with Pork and Pease or Beef and Dough-Boys Their Beef they got by hunting in the Savanahs As long as the Liquor lasted which they bought of us we were treated with it either in Drams or Punch But for a more particular Account of the Logwood-Cutters I shall refer the Reader to my second Voyage hither which I made shortly after my return to Jamaica because I saw a great prospect of getting Money here if Men would be but diligent and frugal But let 's proceed with our Voyage It was the latter end of September 1675. when we sailed from One-Bush-Key with the Tide of Ebb and anchored again at Trist that same Tide where we watered our Vessel in order to sail This we accomplished in two Days and the third day sailed from Trist towards Jamaica A Voyage which proved very tedious and hazardous to us by reason of our ships being so sluggish a Sailer that She would not ply to Wind-ward whereby we were necessarily driven upon several Shoals that otherwise we might have avoided and forced to spend 13 Weeks in our Passage is usually accomplished in half that time We had now a Passenger with us one Will. Wooders a Jamaica Seaman that with three others that were taken by the Spaniards was sent to the City of Mexico where they remained Prisoners 6 or 8 Months but at last were remanded to La vera Cruz and from thence by Sea to Campeachy They were not imprisoned but only kept to Work on Board the Ship that brought them and soon found an opportunity to make their escapes in this manner They had been imployed ashore all the day and being sent aboard at Night they fell to contrive how to run away with the Boat but considering that they wanted Necessaries for their Voyage they resolved first to go back and supply themselves which they might then do the better because they knew there were none but a few Indians on Board Accordingly having seized and bound the Indians taking with them a Compass with some Bread and Water they put off to Sea and arrivd at Trist a Week before our departure And this Will. Wooders was the means under God of the Preservation of our Ship The third day after we left Trist about 8 in the Morning near 12 or 14 Leagues W. S. W. from Campeachy
with their Wings They don't swallow the Fish whole as all other fishing Fowls that ever I saw do but tear it with their Bills and eat it Piece-Meal The Lagunes Creeks and Rivers are plentifully stored with great variety of Fish viz. Mullets Snooks Tenpounders Tarpoms Cavallies Parricootas Garr-fish Stingrays Spanish Mackril with many others Tenpounders are shaped like Mullets but are so full of very small stiff Bones intermixt with the Flesh that you can hardly eat them Parricootas are long Fish with round Bodies like Mackril They have very long Mouths and sharp Teeth they are about 8 or 10 Inches round and three Foot and half long They commonly haunt in Lagunes among Islands or in the Sea near the shore They are a floating Fish and greedily take the Hook and will snap at Men too in the Water We commonly take them when we are under sail with a Hook towing after our Stern They are firm well-tasted Fish but 't is dangerous eating them for some Men have been poisoned with them Divers Persons are of Opinion that these Creatures are poysonous in some Places only and that but at some times of the Year I know that in many Parts of the West-Indies some have been injured by eating them and that at different Seasons of the Year therefore Seamen commonly taste the Liver before they venture any further and if that has a biting taste like Pepper they esteem the fish unwholsom but if not they eat it and yet I have found even this Rule fail too I judge the Head and the Parts near it to be chiefly venomous Garr-fish are round but neither so big nor long as the former but what is more peculiar they have long bony Snouts like the Sword-fish only as the Sword-fishes Snout is flat and indented like a Saw on each side so on the contrary these have their Snouts like a spear round smooth and sharp at the end and about a foot long These are a sort of floaty or Flying Fish for they skip along a Foot or two above the Water for the length of twenty or thirty Yards then they just touch the edge of the Water and spring forward so much farther and then touch the Water and spring forward again a great many times before they cease They dart themselves with such a force that they strike their Snout through the sides of a Cotton-Tree Canoa and we often fear that they will strike quite through our very Bodies They are extraordinary sweet Fish Spanish Mackril are in shape and colour like our Mackril but larger They are three Foot or three and half long and nine or ten Inches about and they also are generally esteeemed very excellent Fish The Ray is a flat Fish like Skate and I have seen three sorts of them viz. the Stingray the Raspray and the Whipray The Stingray and Raspray are much alike in shape but the former has three or four strong sharp Prickles near two Inches long at the Root of its Tail which are said to be very venomous but the rest of his Skin is smooth The Raspray has a rough knotty Skin wherewith Rasps are made the Skins of the largest are so rough that the Spaniards in some Places grate their Cassavy with them which is a Root very common all over the West Indies and of which the Spaniards and English frequently make their Bread but the fairest Skins are useds to cover Surgeons Instrument Cases and other uch fine Things but of late they are counterfeited I have been told that in Turkey Asses Skins are stamped with small hard Seeds which gives them Impressions like Raspray The Whipray differs from the other two sorts having a small but longer Tail and ending with a Knob shaped like a Harpoon All these three sorts are much about a Foot and half broad There is yet another sort of these flat Fish of the Whipray kind but of a prodigious bigness viz. three or four Yards square and their Tails as long these we call Sea-Devils they are very strong Fish and are sometimes Gamesom but they make an odd Figure when they leap out of the Water tumbling over and over Neither are Turtle and Manatee wanting in this Lagune Here are some Hawks-bill-Turtle but the green Turtle is most plentiful They are of a middle size yet here was once a very large one taken as I have mentioned in my Voyages round the World Here are abundance of Manatee which are both large and sweet Alligators are also in great numbers in all the Creeks Rivers and Lagunes in the Bay of Campeachy and I think that no part of the Universe is better stock'd with them The Alligator is a Creature so well known every where that I should not describe it were it not to give an Account of the difference between it and the Crocodile for they resemble each other so nearly in their shape and bulk as also in their Natures that the yare generally mistaken for the same Species only the one supposed to be the Male the other the Female Whether they are so or not the World may judge by the following Observations As to their bulk and length I never saw any so large as some I have heard and read of but according to my best Judgment though I have seen Thousands I never met with any above sixteen or seventeen Foot long and as thick as a large Colt He is shaped like a Lizard of a dark-brown colour with a large head and very long Jaws with great strong Teeth especially two of a Remarkable Length that grow out of and at the very end of the under Jaw in the smallest part on each side one there are two holes in the upper Jaw to receive these otherways he could not shut his Mouth It has 4 short Legs and Broad Claws with a long Tail The Head Back and Tail is fenced with pretty hard Scales joyned together with a very thick tough Skin Over its Eyes there are two hard scally Knobs as big as a Mans Fist and from the Head to the Tail along the Ridge of his Back 't is full of such knotty hard Scales not like Fish-Scales which are loose but so united to the Skin that it is all one with it and can't be taken asunder but with a sharp Knife From the Ridge of the Back down on the Ribs towards the Belly which is of a dusky yellow colour like a Frog there are many of these Scales but not so substantial nor so thick placed as the other These Scales are no hindrance to him in turning for he will turn very quick considering his length When he goes on Land his Tail drags on the Ground The Flesh smells very strong of Musk especially four Kernels or Cods that are always found about them two of which grow in the Groin near each Thigh the other two at the Breast one under each fore Leg and about the bigness of a Pullets Egg therefore when we kill an Alligator we take out these and having
there was no Property each Man destroyed as fast as he could The French I think are greater Destroyers than the English Had it not been for the great care of the Spaniards in Stocking the West Indies with Hogs and Bullocks the Privateers must have starved But now the Main as well as the Islands is plentifully provided particularly the Bay of Campeachy the Islands of Cuba Pines Hispaniola Portarica c. Where besides wild Hogs there are abundance of Crawls or Hog-farms in some of which I have heard there are no less than 1500. This was the main Subsistence of the Privateers But to return again to Beef-Island Our English Hunters have much lessened the numbers of the Cattle there And those that are left by constant shooting are now grown so wild and desperate that it is dangerous for a single Man to fire at them or to venture through the Savannahs For the old Bulls that have been formerly shot will make at him and they will all draw up in Battalia to defend themselves upon our approach the old Bulls in the Front behind them the Cows in the same manner and behind them the young Cattle And if we strive to wheel about to get in the Reer the Balls will certainly face about that way and still present a Front to us Therefore we seldom strive to shoot any out of a great Herd but walk about in the Woods close by the Savannah and there we light of our Game The Beast makes directly at the Hunter if it be desperately wounded as I have experienced my self but if but slightly they commonly run away The old Hunters tell us that a Cow is more dangerous of the two because they say she runs at her Enemy with her Eyes open but the Bull shuts his so that you may easily avoid him But this I cannot affirm upon my own knowledge and rather doubt the truth of it for I knew one shrewdly gor'd by a Bull. He was a Consort with Mr. Barker in the West Lagune where having tir'd themselves with cutting Logwood they took an occasion to go in their Canoa to Beef-Island to refresh themselves there a Fortnight or three Weeks because here were several sorts of Fruits and plenty of Cabbage to eat with their fresh Beef which they could not fail to meet with They came to a Place call'd the Salt Creek and there built them a Hut About 4 a Clock while Mr. Barker lay down to sleep his Consort march'd out into the Savannah about a Mile from their Huts and there coming within shot of a Bull wounded him desperately but yet the Bull had still so much strength left as to pursue and overtake his Adversary trampling on him and goring his Thigh so that he was not able to rise The Bull by this time was spent and fell down dead by him And there the Man had also perished if Mr. Barker had not come the next Morning to seek him who finding him by the dead Beast took him on his Back and lug'd him home to their Hut The next day he put him in his Canoa and delivered him aboard a Ship into the hands of a Surgeon who cured him in a little time I told you we left Capt. Chandler with a design of going to Beef-Island to spend some time in Hunting at Pies Pond before mentioned But before we came thither we went ashore to kill a Beef for Supper where I was surprized with an odd accident Passing through a small Savannah about 2 or 3 Foot deep we smell'd a strong scent of an Alligator and presently after I stumbled over one and fell down immediately I cry'd out for help but my Consorts instead of assisting me ran away towards the Wood. I had no sooner got up to follow them but I stumbled on him a second time and a third time also expecting still when I fell down to be devoured Yet at last I got out safe but so frighted that I never cared for going through the Water again as long as I was in the Bay CHAP. IV. The River St. Peter St. Paul The Mountain-Cow and Hippopotamus Tobasco Island Guavers Tobasco River Manatee Villa de Mosa Estapo Halapo Tacatalpo de Sierra Small Bees Indians Tartillos Posole Cotton Garments Early Marriages Towns Festivals Shape and Features THE River St. Peter St. Paul springs from the high Mountains of Chiapo about 20 Leagues within the Country which are so called from a City not far distant Its first Course is Easterly for a considerable length till it meets with Mountains on that side then it turns short about Northward till within 12 Leagues of the Sea And lastly it divides its self into two Branches The Western Branch falls into the River Tobasco the other keeps its Course till within 4 Leagues of the Sea then divides it self again The Eastermost of these Branches separates Beef-Island from the Main and falls into Man-of-War Lagune as is before related The other keeps it Course and Name till it falls into the Sea between Beef-Island and Tobasco-Island where it is no broader than the Thames at Gravesend There is a Bar at its Entrance but of what depth I know not over which small Vessels may pass well enough by the Benefit of the Tide It is both deeper and broader after you are in for there it is 15 or 16 Foot Water and very good Riding By Report of the Privateers who have been up this River it is very broad before it parts beyond that farther in the Country has divers large Indian Towns built on its Banks the chief of which is called Summasenta and many large Cacao and Plantain-walks the Soil on each side being very Fruitful The unmanur'd Land is overgrown with lofty Trees of many sorts especially the Cotton or Cabbage of the latter there are whole Groves and in some Places especially a little way from the Rivers side great Savannahs full of Bullocks Horses and other Animals amongst which the Mountain Cow called by the Spaniards Ante is most remarkable This Beast is as big as a Bullock of two Years old It is shaped like a Cow in Body but her Head much bigger Her Nose is short and the Head more compact and round She has no Horns Her Eyes are round full and of a prodigious size She has great Lips but not so thick as the Cows Lips Her Ears are in proportion to the Head rather broader than those of the Common Cow Her Neck is thick and short Her Legs also shorter than ordinary She has a pretty long Tail thin of Hairs and no Bob at the end She has course thin Hair all over her Body Her Hide is near two Inches thick Her Flesh is red The Grain of it very fine The Fat is white and altogether it is sweet wholsom Meat One of them will Weigh 5 or 600 Weight This Creature is always found in the Woods near some large River and feeds on a sort of long thin Grass or Moss which grows plentifully on the
great goggle Eyes and is very quick sighted It has a thick Neck and strong Legs but weak Footlocks The Hoofs of his Feet are Cloven in the middle And it has two small Hoofs above the Footlock which bending to the Ground when it goes make an Impression on the Sand like four Claws His Tail is short and tapering like a Swines without any Bob at the end This Beast is commonly fat and very good Meat It graseth ashore in wet swampy Ground near Rivers or Ponds but retires to the Water if pursued When they are in the Water they will sink down to the bottom and there walk as on dry Ground They will run almost as fast as a Man but if chased hard they will turn about and look very fierce like a Boar and fight if put to it The Natives of the Country have no Wars with these Creatures but we had many Conflicts with them both on Shore and in the Rivers and though we commonly got the better by killing some and routing the rest yet in the Water we durst not molest them after one Bout which had like to have proved fatal to 3 Men that went in a small Canoa to kill a single Sea-Horse in a River where was 8 or 10 Foot Water The Horse according to his Custom was marching in the bottom of the River and being espied by these Men they wounded him with a long Lance which so enraged the Beast that he rose up immediately and giving a fierce look he opened his Jaws and bit a great piece of the Gunnal or upper edge of the Canoa and was like to over-set it but presently sunk down again to the bottom and the Men made away as fast as they could for fear he should come again The West Branch of the River St. Peter St. Paul after it has run 8 or 9 Leagues N. W loseth it self in Tobasco River about 4 Leagues from the Sea and so makes the Island Tobasco which is 12 Leagues long and 4 broad at the North end for from the River St. Peter St. Paul to the mouth of Tobasco River is accounted 4 Leagues and the Shore lies East and West The first League on the East is Mangrove-Land with some Sandy Bay where Turtle come ashore to lay their Eggs. The West part of it is Sandy Bay quite to the River Tobasco But because here is constantly a great Sea you have no good Landing till within the River The N. W. part of it is full of Guaver Trees of the greatest variety and their fruit the largest and best tasted I have met with and 't is really a very delicious place There are also some Coco-Plums and Grapes but not many The Savannahs here are naturally fenced with Groves of Guavers and produce good Grass for Pasture and are pretty well stock'd with fat Bullocks and I do believe it is from their eating the Guaver Fruit that these Trees are so thick For this fruit is full of small seeds which being swallowed whole by the Cattle are voided whole by them again and then taking root in their Dung spring up abundantly Here are also Deer in great numbers these we constantly find feeding in the Savannahs Mornings and Evenings And I remember an unlucky Accident whilst I was there Two or three Men went out one Evening purposely to hunt when they were in the spots of Savannahs they separated to find their Game and at last it so happened that one of them fired at a Deer and killed it and while he was skinning it he was shot stark dead by one of his Consorts who fired at him mistaking him for a Deer The poor Man was very sorry for so sad a mischance and for fear of the dead Man's Friends durst never go back again to Jamaica The River of Tobasco is the most noted in all the Bay of Campeachy and springs also from the high Mountains of Chiapo but much more to the Westward than that of St. Peter St. Paul From thence it runs N. E. till within 4 Leagues of the Sea where it receives the fore-mentioned Branch of St. Peter St. Paul and then runs North till it falls into the Sea Its Mouth is about two Miles wide and there is a Bar of Sand lying off it with not above 11 or 12 foot Water but a Mile or two within the Mouth at a nook or bending of the River on the East-side there is three Fathom and good Riding without any danger from the strength of the Current The Tide flows up about four Leagues in the dry Season but in the Rains not so far for then the Freshes make the Ebb run very strong During the Norths it over-flows all the low Land for 14 or 15 Leagues up the River and you may then take up fresh Water without the Bar. This River near its Mouth abounds with Cat-fish with some Snooks and Manatee in great plenty there being good feeding for them in many of its Creeks especially in one place on the Starbord side about 2 Leagues from the Sea which runs into the Land 2 or 300 paces and then opens very wide and is so shoal that you may see their backs above Water as they feed a thing so rare that I have heard our Musketo-men say they never saw it any where else On the least noise they will all scamper out into the River yet the Musketo-men seldom miss of striking them These are a sort of Fresh-water Manatee not altogether so big as the Sea kind but otherwise exactly alike in shape and tast and I think rather fatter The Land by the Rivers especially on tne Starbord side is swampy and over-grown with Trees Here are also abundance of Land-Turtle the largest that I ever saw till I came to the Gallapagos Islands in the S. Seas viz. Mangroves Macaws and other sorts that I know not In some places near the River side further up the Country are Ridges of dry Land full of lofty Cabbage and Cotton Trees which make a very pleasant Landskip There is no Settlement within 8 Leagues of the River's Mouth and then you come to a small Breast-work where there is commonly a Spaniard with 8 or 9 Indians posted on each side the River to watch for Boats coming that way And because there are divers Greeks running in from the Savannahs some of these Sentinels are so placed in the Woods that they may look into the Savannahs for fear of being surprized on the back side Yet for all their caution these Sentinels were snap'd by Captain Nevil Commander of a small Brigantine in a second Expedition that he made to take the Town called Villa de Mose His first Attempt miscarried by his being discovered But the second time he got into a Creek a League below these Sentinels and there dragging his Canoas over some Trees that were laid cross it purposely to hinder his passage he came in the night upon their backs in their several Posts so that the Town having no notice of his coming
by their firing as they should have done was taken without any resistance Villa de Mose is a small Town standing on the Starbord side of the River four Leagues beyond this Breast-work 'T is inhabited chiefly by Indians with some Spaniards there is a Church in the middle and a Fort at the West end which commands the River Thus far Ships come to bring goods especially European Commodities viz. Broad-cloth Serges Perpetuana's Kersies Thred-Stockings Hats Ozenbrigs white and blew Ghentins Platilloes Britannias Hollandilloes Iron-work c. They arrive here in November or December and stay till June or July selling their Commodities and then load chiefly with Cacao and some Sylvester All the Merchants and petty Traders of the Country Towns come hither about Christmas to Traffick which makes this Town the chiefest in all these parts Campeachy excepted yet there are but few Rich Men that live here Sometimes Ships that come hither load Hides and Tallow if they cannot fraight with Cacao But the chiefest place for Hides is a Town lying on a Branch of this River that comes out a League below the Breast-work where Spanish Barks usually lade once a year but I can give no further account of it Four Leagues beyond Villa de Mose further up the River lies Estapo inhabited partly with Spaniards but most Indians as generally the Towns in this Country are it 's said to be pretty rich stands close by the River on the South side and is so built between two Creeks that there is but one Avenue leading to it and so well guarded with a Breast-work that Captain Hewet a Privateer who had under him near 200 Men was there repulsed losing many of them and himself wounded in the Leg. In his way thither he took Villa de Mose and left a Party there to secure his Retreat If he had taken Estapo he designed to pass on to Halpo a Rich Town three Leagues farther up the River and from thence to visit Tacatalpo lying 3 or 4 Leagues beyond which is accounted the wealthiest of the three the Spaniards call it Tacatalpo de Sierra whether to distinguish it from another Town of that name or to denote its nearness to the Mountains I know not 'T is the best Town on this River having three Churches and several Rich Merchants and between it and Villa de Mose are many large Cacao Walks on each side the River I have seen a sort of white Cacao brought from hence which I never met with any where else It is of the same bigness and colour on the outside and with such a thin husky Coat as the other but the inner substance is white like fine Flower and when the outward Coat is broken it crumbles as a lump of Flower doth Those that frequent the Bay call it Spuma and affirm that it is much used by the Spaniards of those parts to make their Chocolate froth who therefore set a great value on it But I never yet met with any in England that knew it except the Right Honourable the Earl of Carbery who was pleased to tell me he had seen of it The Land on the South side of the River is low Savannahs or Pasture The side where the Town of Villa de Mose stands is a sort of grey sandy Earth and the whole Country the Up-land I mean seems to be much the same But the Low-land is of a black deep Mould and in some places very strong Clay and there is not a Stone to be found in all the Country The healthy dry Land is very Woody except where inhabited or planted It is pretty thick settled with Indian Towns who have all a Padre or two among them and a Cacique or Governour to keep the Peace The Cacao Tree thrives here very well but the Nuts are smaller than the Caraccus Nuts yet Oyly and Fat whilst New They are not planted near the Sea as they are on the Coast of Caraccus but at least 8 or 10 Miles up in the Country The Cacao-walks belong chiefly to the Spaniards and are only planted and dress'd by Indians hired for that purpose yet the Indians have of their own Plantain-walks Plantations of Maiz and some small Cacao-walks about which they spend the chiefest of their time Some Employ themselves to search in the Woods for Bees that build in hollow Trees and get a good livelihood by their Honey and Wax These are of two sorts One pretty large the other no bigger but longer than an ordinary black Fly in other respects just like our common Bees only of a darker colour Their Stings are not strong enough to enter a Man's Skin but if disturbed they will fly at one as furiously as the great Bees and will tickle but cannot hurt you Their Honey is white and clear and they make a great deal of it The Indians keep of them tame and cut hollow Trunks for them to make their Combs in They place one end of the Log which is saw'd very even on a Board leaving a hole for the Bees to creep in at and the upper end is covered with a Board put close over it The young and lusty Indians such as want Employment hire themselves to the Spaniards They Work cheap and are commonly paid in such Goods as the Spaniards do not value And I have been told that they are obliged to Work for their Masters one day in a Week gratis But whether this Priviledge belongs only to the Padres or to the Laity also I know not The Indians inhabiting these Villages live like Gentlemen in Comparison of those that are near any great Town such as Campeachy or Merida for there even the Poorer and Rascally sort of People that are not able to hire one of these poor Creatures will by violence drag them to do their Drudgery for nothing after they have work'd all day for their Masters nay they often take them out of the Market from their Business or at least enjoyn them to come to their Houses when their Market is ended and they dare not refuse to do it This Country is very fruitful yielding plentiful Crops of Maiz which is their chiefest Subsistence After it is boil'd they bruise it on such a Rubbing-stone as Chocolate is grownd on Some of it they make into small thin Cakes called Tartilloes The rest they put into a Jar till it grows sowr and when they are thirsty mix a handful of it in a Callabash of Water which gives it a sharp pleasant taste then streining it through a large Callabash prick'd full of small Holes to keep out the Husks they drink it off If they treat a Friend with this Drink they mix a little Honey with it for their Ability reaches no higher And this is as acceptable to them as a Glass of Wine to us If they travel for two or three Days from Home they carry some of this Grown'd Maiz in a Plantain Leaf and a Callabash at their Girdles to make their drink and take no farther
only mention two Rivers in the South Sea that I have taken notice of in my Voyage round the World viz. the Gulph of St. Michael and the River of Guiaquill In the Gulph of St. Michael there are many large Rivers which all disembogue into a Lagune of 2 or 3 Leagues wide This Lagune is barricadoed from the Sea with some small low Mangrovy Islands and between them are Creeks and Channels through which the Tides make their daily passes into the Lagune and from thence into the Rivers and so back again many times over-flowing the said Islands and leaving the tops of the lower Trees above Water The Rivers that run into this Lagune are pretty narrow and bounded on each side with steep Banks as high as the Floods use to rise and but very little higher For at High-water and on a Spring-tide the Water is almost or altogether even with the Land The Lagune at the Mouth of the Rivers is but small neither is there any other way for the Water to force it self into beside the Lagune and Rivers and therefore the Tides do rise and fall here 18 or 20 Foot The River of Guiaquil in this respect is much the same with the Gulph of St. Michael but the Lagunes near it are larger Here the Tide rises and falls 16 Foot perpendicular I don't know of any other such Places in all the South Seas yet there are other large Rivers on the Coast between these Places but none so remarkable for high Tides The great Tides in the Gulph of St. Michael have doubtless been the occasion of that Opinion which some hold that there 's a Subterreanean Communication between the North and the South Seas and that the Isthmus of Darien is like an Arched Bridge under which the Tides make their constant Courses as duly as they do under London-Bridge And more to confirm this Opinion some have said that there are continual and strange Noises made by those Subterranean Fluxes and Refluxes and that they are heard by the Inhabitants of the Isthmus and also that Ships sailing in the Bay of Panama are toss'd to and fro at a prodigious rate Sometimes say they they are by the boiling of the Water dash'd against Islands and in a moment left dry there or staved in pieces at othertimes they are drawen or suck'd up as 't were in a Whirl-Pool and ready to be carried under Ground into the North Seas with all Sails standing They have said also that when the Tide flows especially on a Spring the Islands in the Bay are all over-flown nay and even the Country for a great way together and then nothing is to be seen but the tops of Trees But if this were so 't is much that I and those that I was with should not have heard or seen something of it For I pass'd the Isthmus twice and was 23 days in the last Trip that I made over it but yet did I never hear of any Noises under Ground there I sailed also in the South Seas taking in both times that I was there near 3 Years several Months of it I was in the Bay of Panama And after I went away those of our Crew that remained there spent a great deal more time in that Bay Yet did they never meet with such strange Whirl-Pooles but found as pleasant sailing there as any where in the World Neither did I ever hear any of the Spaniards or Indians make mention of any such thing in all my Converse with them which certainly they would have done if they had ever experienced it had it been only to terrifie us and scare us away from their Coasts I remember indeed our Country-man Mr. Gage gives some hints of these strange Currents in this Bay in his Book called A New Survey of the West Indies from P. 538 to 440. but I am afraid he took most of it upon trust from others or else he was Sea-sick all that little Voyage for he gives a very imperfect and lame Account of that Business as if he understood not what he wrote I should dislike his whole Book for that one stories sake if I did not know that he has written candidly upon other Matters but I think I have said enough of this To proceed then As to the great Tides which are reported to be in these Seas I have given instances of them but they are not so great as is reported neither do they ebb and flow so much any where as in the Gulph of St. Michael only where indeed they flow over those small low Mangrove Islands at the Mouth of the Lagune and leave only the tops of the low Trees above Water for those Islands are very low neither do they afford any high Trees But however the Islands at the Mouth of the Gulph before you come to these low ones are near over-flown yet are they very small and low in comparison with other Islands in the Bay of Panama And indeed should the Islands in that Bay be over-flown the City of Panama would soon be many Yards under Water But so far is this from being true that the Pearl Islands which are very flat and low are yet never over-flown For there the Tide riseth and falls not above 10 or 11 Foot on a Spring at the Southermost end of them which is almost opposite to the Gulph of St. Michael and not above 12 or 14 Leagues distant from it And yet there it flows more than it does at or near Panama or any other Place in the Bay except just at the Mouths of Rivers by 2 or 3 Foot Therefore all that report is wholly grounless But to go on I have also observed that Islands lying far off at Sea have seldom such high Tides as those that are near the Main or as any Places on the Main it self as for example at the Gallapagos Islands which lye about 100 Leagues from the Main The Tides don't rise and fall above a Foot and half or two Foot which is less than they do on the Coast of the Main For on most Places of the Main it rises and falls 2 or 3 Foot more or less according as the Coast is more or less exposed to Indraughts or Rivers Guam one of the Ladrone Islands is also another instance of this There the Tide riseth not above 2 or 3 Foot at most In the Bay of Panama the Tides do keep a more constant and regular Course than on other Places on the Coasts of Peru and Mexico it was for that reason I called them Currents in some Places mentioned in my Voyage round the VVorld as particularly near Guatulca on the Mexican Continent in Chap. IX Page 238. but it was truly a Tide which there I called a Current and it sets to the Eastward as the ebb doth to the West The Tides there do rise and fall about 5 Foot as they do on most parts of that Coast. At Ria Leja they rise and fall about 8 or 9 Foot At Amapala they also rise
California The 19th day in the evening we sailed from the Island Lobos with Captain Eaton in our Company We carried the 3 Flower Prizes with us but our first Prize laden with Timber we left here at an Anchor the Wind was at S. by E. which is the common Trade-Wind here and we steered away N. W. by N. intending to run into the latitude of the Isles Gallapagos and steer off West because we did not know the certain distance and therefore could not shape a direct course to them When we came within 40 minutes of the Equator we steered West having the Wind at South a very moderate gentle Gale It was the 31st day of May when we first had sight of the Islands Gallapagos Some of them appeared on our Weather-bow some on our Lee-bow others right a head We at first sight trimm d our Sails and steered as nigh the Wind as we could striving to get to the Southermost of them but our Prizes being deep laden their Sails but small and thin and a very small Gale they could not keep up with us therefore we likewise edged away again a point from the Wind to keep near them and in the evening the Ship that I was in and Captain Eaton Anchored on the East side of one of the Eastermost Islands a mile from the shore in 16 fathom Water clean white hard Sand. The Gallapagos Islands are a great number of uninhabited Islands lying under and on both sides of the Equator The Eastermost of them are about 110 leagues from the Main They are laid down in the longitude of 181 reaching to the Westward as far as 176 therefore their longitude from England Westward is about 68 degrees But I believe our Hydrographers do not place them far enough to the West-ward The Spaniards who first discovered them and in whose drafts alone they are laid down report them to be a great number stretching North-West from the Line as far as 5 degrees N. but we saw not above 14 or 15. They are some of them 7 or 8 leagues long and 3 or 4 broad They are of a good heighth most of them flat and even on the top 4 or 5 of the Eastermost are rocky barren and hilly producing neither Tree Herb nor Grass but a few Dildoe-trees except by the Sea side The Dildoe-tree is a green prickly shrub that grows about 10 or 12 foot high without either Leaf or Fruit. It is as big as a mans Leg from the root to the top and it is full of sharp prickles growing in thick rows from top to bottom This shrub is fit for no use not so much as to burn Close by the Sea there grows in some places bushes of Burton-wood which is very good firing This sort of Wood grows in many places in the West Indies especially in the Bay of Campeachy and in the Sambaloes I did never see any in these Seas but here There is Water on these barren Islands in ponds and holes among the Rocks Some other of these Islands are mostly plain and low and the Land more fertile producing Trees of divers sorts unknown to us Some of the Westermost of these Islands are 9 or 10 leagues long and 6 or 7 broad the Mould deep and black These produce Trees of great and tall bodies especially Mammee-trees which grow here in great Groves In these large Islands there are some pretty big Rivers and on many of the other lesser Islands there are Brooks of good Water The Spaniards when they first discovered these Islands found multitudes of Guanoes and Land-turtle or Tortoise and named them the Gallapago's Islands I do believe there is no place in the World that is so plentifully stored with these Animals The Guanoes here are as fat and large as any that I ever saw they are so tame that a man may knock down 20 in an hours time with a club The Land-turtle are here so numerous that 5 or 600 men might subsist on them alone for several months without any other sort of Provision They are extraordinary large and fat and so sweet that no Pullet eats more pleasantly One of the largest of these Creatures will weight 150 or 200 weight and some of them are 2 foot or 2 foot 6 inches over the Callapee or Belly I did never see any but at this place that will weigh above 30 pound weight I have heard that at the Isle of St. Lawrence or Madagascar and at the English Forest an Island near it called also Don Mascarin and now possessed by the French there are very large ones but whether so big fat and sweet as these I know not There are 3 or 4 sorts of these Creatures in the West Indies One is called by the Spaniards Hecatee these live most in fresh Water-ponds and seldom come on Land They weigh about 10 or 15 pound they have small Legs and flat Feet and small long Necks Another sort is called Tenapen these are a great deal less than the Hecatee the Shell on their Backs is all carved naturally finely wrought and well clouded the Backs of these are rounder than those before mentioned they are otherwise much of the same form these delight to live in wet swampy places or on the Land near such places Both these sorts are very good Meat They are in great plenty on the Isle of Pines near Cuba there the Spanish Hunters when they meet them in the Woods bring them home to their Huts and mark them by notching their Shells then let them go this they do to have them at hand for they never ramble far from thence When these Hunters return to Cuba after about a Month or six Weeks stay they carry with them 3 or 400 or more of these Creatures to sell for they are very good Meat and every man knows his own by their Marks These Tortoise in the Gallapago's are more like the Hecatee except that as I said before they are much bigger and they have very long small Necks and little Heads There are some green Snakes on these Islands but no other Land Animal that I did ever see There are great plenty of Turtle-Doves so tame that a Man may kill 5 or 6 dozen in a forenoon with a Stick They are somewhat less than a Pigeon and are very good Meat and commonly fat There are good wide Channels between these Islands fit for Ships to pass and in some places shole Water where there grows plenty of Turtle-grass therefore these Islands are plentifully stored with Sea-Turtle of that sort which is called the Green-Turtle I have hitherto deferred the Description of these Creatures therefore I shall give it here There are 4 sorts of Sea-turtle viz. the Trunk-turtle the Loggerhead the Hawksbill and the Green Turtle The Trunk-turtle is commonly bigger than the other their backs are higher and rounder and their flesh rank and not wholsome The Loggerhead is so called because it hath a great Head much bigger than the other sorts their flesh is
to borrow so much Money pretending urgent occasions for it and they dare not deny him Sometimes he will send to sell one thing or another that he hath to dispose of to such whom he knows to have Money and they must buy it and give him his price and if afterward he hath occasion for the same thing he must have it if he sends for it He is but a little Man between 50 and 60 years old and by relation very good natured but over-ruled by those about him He has a Queen and keeps about 20 Women or Wives more in whose company he spends most of his time He has one Daughter by his Sultaness or Queen and a great many Sons and Daughters by the rest These walk about the streets and would be always begging things of us but it is reported that the young Princess is kept in a room and never stirs out and that she did never see any Man but her Father and Raja Laut her Uncle being then about 14 years old When the Sultan visits his Friends he is carried in a small Couch on 4 Mens shoulders with 8 or 10 armed Men to guard him but he never goes far this way for the Country is very woody and they have but little paths which renders it the less commodious When he takes his pleasure by Water he carries some of his Wives along with him The Proes that are built for this purpose are large enough to entertain 50 or 60 persons or more The Hull is neatly built with a round head and stern and over the Hull there is a small slight house built with Bamboes the sides are made up with split Bamboes about 4 foot high with little Windows in them of the same to open and shut at their pleasure The roof is almost slat neatly that ched with Palmeto leaves This house is divided into 2 or 3 small Partitions or Chambers one particularly for himself This is neatly matted underneath and round the sides and there is a Carpit and Pillows for him to sleep on The second Room is for his Women much like the former The third is for the Servants who tend them with Tobacco and Betel-nut for they are always chewing or smoaking The fore and after parts of the Vessel are for the Mariners to sit and row Besides this they have Outlayers such as those I described at Guam only the Boats and Outlayers here are larger These Boats are more round like the Half-Moon almost and the Bamboes or Outlayers that reach from the Boat are also crooked Besides the Boat is not flat on one side here as at Guam but hath a Belly and Outlayers on each side and whereas at Guam there is a little Boat fasten'd to the Outlayers that lies in the Water the Beams or Bamboes here are fastned traverse-wise to the Outlayers on each side and touch not the Water like Boats but 1 3 or 4 foot above the Water and serve for the Barge-men to sit and row and paddle on the inside of the Vessel except only just afore and abaft being taken up with the apartments for the Passengers There run across the Outlayers two tire of Beams for the Paddlers to sit on on each side the Vessel The lower tire of these Beams is not above a foot from the water so that upon any the least reeling of the Vessel the Beams are dipt in the water and the men that sit are wet up to their waste their feet seldom escaping the water And thus as all our Vessels are Rowed from within these are Paddled from without The Sultan hath a Brother called Raja Laut a brave man He is the second man in the Kingdom All strangers that come hither to trade must make their address to him for all Sea affairs belong to him He licenceth strangers to import or export any Commodity and 't is by his permission that the Natives themselves are suffered to trade Nay the very Fishermen must take a permit from him so that there is no man can come into the River or go out but by his leave He is 2 or 3 years younger than the Sultan and a little man like him He has 8 Women by some of whom he hath Issue He hath only one Son about 12 or 14 years old who was Circumcised while we were there His eldest Son died a little before we came hither for whom he was still in great heaviness If he had lived a little longer he should have married the young Princess but whether this second Son must have her I know not for I did never hear any discourse about it Raja Laut is a very sharp man he speaks and writes Spanish which he learned in his youth He has by often conversing with Strangers got a great insight into the Customs of other Nations and by Spanish Books has some knowledge of Europe He is General of the Mindanaians and is accounted an expert Soldier and a very stout man and the Women in their dances sings many Songs in his praise The Sultan of Mindanao sometimes makes War with his Neighbours the Mountaneers or Alfoors Their Weapons are Swords Lances and some hand Cressets The Cresset is a small thing like a Baggonet which they always wear in War or Peace at work or play from the greatest of them to the poorest and meanest persons They do never meet each other so as to have a pitcht Battle but they build small Works or Forts of Timber wherein they plant little Guns and lye in sight of each other 2 or 3 months skirmishing every day in small Parties and sometimes surprizing a Brest-work and whatever side is like to be worsted if they have no probability to escape by flight they sell their lives as dear as they can for there is seldom any quarter given but the Conquerour cuts and hacks his Enemies to pieces The Religion of these people is Mahometanism Friday is their Sabbath but I did never see any difference that they make between this day and any other day only the Sultan himself goes then to his Mosque twice Raja Laut never goes to the Mosque but prays at certain hours 8 or 10 times in a day where-ever he is he is very punctual to his Canonical hours and if he be aboard will go ashore on purpose to pray For no business nor company hinders him from this Duty Whether he is at home or abroad in a house or in the field he leaves all his Company and goes about 100 yards off and there kneels down to his Devotion He first kisses the ground then prays aloud and divers times in his Prayers he kisses the ground and does the same when he leaves off His Servants and his Wives and Children talk and sing or play how they please all the time but himself is very serious The meaner sort of people have little Devotion I did never see any of them at their Prayers or go into a Mosque In the Sultans Mosque there is a great Drum with but one
it was to bring us into a true Trade wind yet we could not get thither under a fortnight and if we should meet calms as we might probably expect it might be much longer Besides we should lose our passage about the Cape till October or November this being about the latter end of March for after the 10th of May 't is not usual to beat about the Cape to come home All circumstances therefore being weighed and considered we at last unanimously agreed to prosecute our Voyage towards the Cape and with patience wait for a shift of Wind. But Captain Heath having thus far sounded the inclination of his weak men told them that it was not enough that they all consented to beat for the Cape for our desires were not sufficient to bring us thither but that there would need a more than ordinary labour and management from those that were able And withal for their encouragement he promised a months pay Gratis to every man that would engage to assist on all occasions and be ready upon call whether it were his turn to watch or not and this money he promised to pay at the Cape This offer was first imbraced by some of the Officers and then as many of the men as found themselves in a capacity listed themselves in a Roll to serve theit Commander This was wisely contrived of the Captain for he could not have compell'd them in their weak condition neither would fair words alone without some hopes of a reward have engag d them to so much extraordinary work for the Ship Sail and Rigging were much out of repair For my part I was too weak to enter my self in that list for else our common safety which I plainly saw lay at stake would have prompted me to do more than any such reward would do In a short time after this it pleased God to favour us with a fine Wind which being improved to the best advantage by the incessant labour of these new listed men brought us in a short time to the Cape The night before we entered the Harbour which was about the beginning of April being near the land we fired a Gun every hour to give notice that we were in distress The next day a Dutch Captain came aboard in his Boat who seeing us so weak as not to be able to trim our Sails to turn into the Harbour though we did tollerably well at Sea before the Wind and being requested by our Captain to assist him sent ashore for a hundred lusty men who immediately came aboard and brought our Ship in to an anchor They also unbent our Sails and did every thing for us that they were required to do for which Captain Heath gratified them to the full These men had better stomachs than we and eat freely of such food as the Ship afforded and they having the freedom of our Ship to go to and fro between Decks made prize of what they could lay their hands on especially salt Beef which our men for want of stomachs in the Voyage had hung up 6 8 or 10 pieces in a place This was conveyed away before we knew it or thought of it besides in the night there was a Bale of Muzlins broke open and a great deal conveyed away but whether the Muslins were stoln by our own men or the Dutch I cannot say for we had some very dexterous Thieves in our Ship Being thus got safe to an anchor the sick were presently sent ashore to quarters provided for them and those that were able remained aboard and had good fat Mutton or fresh Beef sent aboard every day I went ashore also with my painted Prince where I remained with him till the time of sailing again which was about 6 weeks In which time I took the opportunity to inform my self of what I could concerning this Country which I shall in this next place give you a brief account of and so make what haste I can home The Cape of Good Hope is the utmost bounds of the continent of Africa towards the South lying in 34 d. 30 m S. lat in a very temperate Climate I look upon this latitude to be one of the mildest and sweetest for its temperature of any whatsoever and I cannot here but take notice of a common prejudice our European Seamen have as to this Country that they look upon it as much colder than places in the same lat to the North of the the Line I am not of their opinion as to that and their thinking so I believe may easily be accounted for from hence that whatever way they come to the Cape whether going to the East Indies or returning back they pass thro a hot Climate and coming to it thus out of an extremity of heat 't is no wonder if it appear the colder to them Some impute the coldness of the South Wind here to its blowing off from Sea On the contrary I. have always observ d the Sea Winds to be warmer than Land Winds unless it be when a bloom we call it or hot b'ast blow from thence Such an one we felt in this very Voyage as we went from Cape Verd Islands towards the South Seas which I forgot to mention in its proper place Chap. 4th For one afternoon about the 19th of Jan. 1683 in the lat of 37 South we felt a brisk gale coming from off the Coast of America but so violently hot that we thought it came from some burning Mountain on the shore and was like the heat from the mouth of an Oven Just such another gleam I felt one afternoon also as I lay at anchor at the Groin in July 1694. it came with a Southerly Wind both these were followed by a Thunder-shower These were the only great blooms I ever met with in my Travels But setting these aside which are exceptions I have made it my general observation that the Sea Winds are a great deal warmer than those which blow from Land unless where the Wind blows from the Poles which I take to be the true cause of the coldness of the South Wind at the Cape for it is cold at Sea also And as for the coldness of Land-Winds as the South-West parts of Europe are very sensible of it from the Northern and Eastern Winds so on the opposite Coast of Virginia they are as much pinch d with the North-West Winds blowing excessively cold from over the Continent though its lat be not much greater than this of the Cape But to proceeed This large Promontory consists of high and very remarkable Land and off at Sea it affords a very pleasant and agreeable prospect And without doubt the prospect of it was very agreeable to those Portuguese who first found out this way by Sea to the East-Indies when after coasting along the vast Continent of Africk towards the South Pole they had the comfort of seeing the Land and their course end in this promontory which therefore they called the Cape de Bon
Esperance or of Good Hope finding that they might now proceed Eastward There is good Sounding off this Cape 50 or 60 leagues at Sea to the Southward and therefore our English Seamen standing over as they usually do from the Coast of Brazil content themselves with their Soundings concluding thereby that they are abrest of the Cape they often pass by without seeing it and begin to shape their course Northward They have several other signs whereby to know when they are near it as by the Sea-Fowl they meet at Sea especially the Algatrosses a very large long-winged Bird and the Mangovolucres a smaller Fowl But the greatest dependance of our English Seamen now is upon their observing the variation of the Compass which is very carefully minded when they come near the Cape by taking the Suns Amplitude mornings and evening This they are so exact in that by the help of the Azimuth Compass an Instrument more peculiar to the Seamen of our Nations they know when they are abrest of the Cape or are either to the East or the West of it and for that reason though they should be to Southward of all the Soundings or fathomable ground they can shape their course right without being obliged to make the Land But the Dutch on the contrary having settled themselves on this Promontory do always touch here in their East India Voyages both going and coming The most remarkable Land at Sea is a high Mountain steep to the Sea with a flat even top which is called the Table Land On the West side of the Cape a little to the Northward of it there is a spacious Harbour with a low flat Island lying off it which you may leave on either hand and pass in or out securely at either end Ships that anchor here ride near the Main Land leaving the Island at a farther distance without them The Land by the Sea against the Harbour is low but backt with high Mountains a little way in to the Southward of it The Soil of this Country is of a brown colour not deep yet indifferently productive of Grass Herbs and Trees The Grass is short like that which grows on our Wiltshire or Dorsetshire Downs The Trees hereabouts are but small and few the Country also farther from the Sea does not much abound in Trees as I have been informed The Mould or Soyl also is much like this near the Harbour which though it cannot be said to be very fat or rich Land yet it is very fit for cultivation and yields good Crops to the industrious Husbandman and the Country is pretty well settled with Farms Dutch Families and French Refugees for 20 or 30 leagues up the Country but there are but few Farms near the Harbour Here grows plenty of Wheat Barly Pease c. Here are also Fruits of many kinds as Apples Pears Quinces and the largest Pomgranats that I did ever see The chief Fruits are Grapes These thrive very well and the Country is of late years so well stockt with Vineyards that they make abundance of Wine of which they have enough and to spare and do sell great quantities to Ships that touch here This Wine is like a French High Country White Wine but of a pale yellowish colour it is sweet very pleasant and strong The tame Animals of this Country are Sheep Goats Hogs Cows Horses c. The Sheep are very large and fat for they thrive very well here This being a dry Country and the short pasturage very agreeable to these Creatures but it is not so proper for great Cattle neither is the Beef in its kind so sweet as the Mutton Of wild Beasts 't is said here are several sorts but I saw none However it is very likely there are some wild Beasts that prey on the Sheep because they are commonly brought into the Houses in the night and penn'd up There is a very beautiful sort of wild Al 's in this Country whose body is curiously striped with equal lists of white and black the stripes coming from the ridge of his Back and ending under the Belly which is white These stripes are two or three Fingers broad running parallel with each other and curiously intermixt one white and one black over from the Shoulder to the Rump I saw two of the Skins of these Beasts dried and preserved to be sent to Halland as a rarity They seemed big enough to inclose the Body of a Beast as big as a large Colt of a twelvemonth old Here are a great many Ducks Dunghil Fowls c. and Ostriges are plentifully found in the dry Mountains and Plains I eat of their Eggs here and those of whom I bought them told me that these creatures lay their Eggs in the Sand or at least on dry ground and so leave them to be hatch'd by the Sun The meat of one of their Eggs will suffice two men very well The Inhabitants do preserve the Eggs that they find to sell to strangers They were pretty scarce when I was here it being the beginning of their Winter whereas I was told they lay their Eggs about Christmas which is their Summer The Sea hereabouts affords plenty of Fish of divers sorts especially a small sort of Fish not so big as a Herring whereof they have such great plenty that they pickle great quantities yearly and send them to Europe Seales are also in great numbers about the Cape which as I have still observed is a good sign of the plentifulness of Fish which is their food The Dutch have a strong Fort by the Sea side against the Harbour where the Governour lives At about 2 or 300 paces distance from thence on the West side of the Fort there is a small Dutch Town in which I told about 50 or 60 Houses low but well built with Stone-walls there being plenty of Stone drawn out of a Quarry close by On the backside of the Town as you go towards the Mountains the Dutch East-India Company have a large House and a stately Garden walled in with a high Stone Wall This Garden is full of divers sorts of Herbs Flowers Roots and Fruits with curious spacious Gravel-walks and Arbors and is watered with a Brook that descends out of the Mountains which being cut into many channels is conveyed into all parts of the Garden The Hedges which make the Walks are very thick and 9 or 10 foot high They are kept exceeding neat and even by continual pruning There are lower Hedges within these again which serve to separate the Fruit-trees from each other but without shading them and they keep each sort of Fruit by themselves as Apples Pears abundance of Quinces Pomgranats c. These all prosper very well and bear good Fruit especially the Pomgranat The Roots and Garden-herbs have also their distinct places hedged in apart by themselves and all in such order that it is exceeding pleasant and beautiful There are a great number of Negro Slaves brought from other parts of the